Sie Op WL Ul1066printupdated

Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker
UL 1066 Circuit Breaker
Operating Instructions Catalog No.: CBIM-02000-0119
DANGER
Hazardous voltage.
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this equipment before working on this device.
923 99984 174 3ZX1812-0WL00-1AN2

NOTE
These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, or to provide for every possible contingency to be met in 
connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise, which are
not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Siemens sales office. The contents of this
instruction manual shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains
the entire obligation of Siemens. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Siemens. Any statements
contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty.

TRADEMARKS
Unless otherwise noted, all names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG or Siemens Industry, Inc. The remaining 
trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Symbols
Visual examination
Hook
Slotted-type screwdriver
Cruciform screwdriver
Philips (PH), PoziDriv (PZ)
Torx screwdriver (T)
Hex socket screwdriver
Open end wrench
Tightening torque
10 Nm 89 lb-in
Cable tie
Add in writing
1 First step of action sequence

Contents
1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Replacing the fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Removing from service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
2 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Circuit breaker frame accessory label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 7 Frame sizes / dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Circuit breaker frame type label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Frame size II Drawout (3-Pole and 4-Pole) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Frame designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Frame size II fused . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Trip unit designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Frame size II, fixed-mounted version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Rating Plug label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Frame size II, door cut-outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Cradle type label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Frame size III, fixed-mounted version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
3 Standard specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Frame size III Drawout (3-Pole and 4-Pole) . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Frame size III, fuse carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
4 Packing and Lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Frame size III, door cut-outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 External sensor for neutral conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Further dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Lifting with a crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Lifting with a Lifting Bar Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 8 Circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Lifting bar assembly (3-pole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Lifting bar assembly (4-pole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Auxiliary switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Lifting the circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Signaling switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Lifting the fuse carriage (frame size III) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Shunt Trip, Undervoltage Trip / Electrical closing lockout . 8-4
Closing Coil / Electrical CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
5 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Motor-operated mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Remote Bell Alarm Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Mounting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Trip unit circuitry for ETU745-776 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Mounting on horizontal surface -  With Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) 
Mounting tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 and metering module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Cubicle and ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Metering module only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Main terminal connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Cradle connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Horizontal connections for 4-pole fixed mount breakers 5-5 9 Electronic components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Vertical connections for 4-pole fixed mount breakers . 5-5 Trip units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Bus connections to the cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Overview of function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Application and configuration of fused circuit breakers 5-8 Trip unit ETU745 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Secondary wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Trip unit ETU776 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Breaker Secondary Disconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Cradle Secondary Disconnect Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Protective functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Secondary disconnect terminal blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 ETU displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Wiring in cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Rating Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Catalog numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Ground-fault protection modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Replace the trip unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49
6 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Internal trip unit self-test on
Preparation of draw-out circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 the overcurrent tripping function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Inserting the circuit breaker into the cradle . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Sealing and locking device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Positions of the circuit breaker in the cradle . . . . . . . . . 6-2 CubicleBUS Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Unlocking the racking handle / System architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
withdrawing the racking handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Internal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55
Racking circuit breaker into connected position . . . . . . 6-3 External CublicleBUS modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-83
Inserting racking handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 External sensor for neutral conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97
Charge the closing spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 External voltage supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-98
Check list for commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Handheld test device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99
Closing the circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99
Opening the circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-99
Tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100
Reclosing a circuit breaker tripped by the trip unit . . . . . . 6-9 Voltage supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100
Re-commissioning after fused tripping (Not applicable for 4- Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100
pole) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 Finishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-103
I
10 Reset the reclosing lockout and the Bell Alarm . . . . 10-1 Breaker mounted key lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
Resetting the Bell Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Cradle mounted key lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
Resetting the Bell Alarm with reclosing lockout (optional) 10-2 Installing racking handle key lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Field Installation of a reclosing lockout . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Installing a Bell Alarm cover key lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15
Removing the automatic reset mechanism . . . . . . . . 10-4 Padlocking provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-16
Installing the remote Bell Alarm reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Padlock locking the breaker OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-17
Mounting remote reset coil and cut-off switch . . . . . . 10-5 Optional: Intalling padlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-19
Connecting wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Padlock Locking device for guide rails . . . . . . . . . . . 15-20
Function test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Padlock Locking device for racking handle . . . . . . . . 15-20
Updating the options label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Padlock Locking device for spring charging lever . . . 15-20
11 Shunt Trip / Closing Coil / Undervoltage release . . . 11-1 CLOSE/OPEN padlock kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-22
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 16 Sealing covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Installing shunt trips, closing coils, and undervoltage devices 17 Mechanical interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
11-2 Field installation of CLOSE / OPEN buttons blocking device
Installing optional signaling switches on shunt trips, closing 17-2
coils, and undervoltage devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Cubicle door interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Setting delay times on undervoltage release . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Installing the interlock mechanism to the cradle . . . . . 17-4
Field Installation of a cut-off switch for shunt Cubicle door interlock drill pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
trips and closing coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 Installing catch on the cubicle door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
Mechanical function test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-5
Connecting wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Interlock to prevent racking with cubicle door open . . . . 17-6
Final tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Coding between circuit breaker and cradle . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7
Electrical function test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
Updating the options label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 18 Additional options for the cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Shutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
12 Auxiliary and control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Field installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
Installing internal auxiliary switches S1 - S4 . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Catalog numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Installing the "Ready-to-close" switch S20 . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 Truck Operated Contacts - TOC (Cradle Accessory) . . . 18-5
Trip Signaling Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Trip Signaling Switches S13, S24, and S26 . . . . . . . . 12-5 19 Mechanical circuit breaker interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
Control switches - Connecting wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
Communication switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
Connecting secondary wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Mechanical interlocking two sources (open transition) 19-3
Updating the options label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Mechanical interlocking two
Mechanism Operated Contacts (MOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7 sources with a tie circuit breaker (open transition) . . . 19-4
MOC Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 Mechanical interlocking feeder circuit breakers
MOC Installation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8 (single load, open transition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
Order numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13 Mechanical interlocking three sources
Combination of MOC and (open transition to standby system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
mechanical interlocking module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 Mechanical interlocking source and tie circuit breaker
Mounting of MOC and mechanical (open transition to standby system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
interlocking module on the cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14 Installing interlocking module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
Installing intermediate shaft and coupling . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
13 Motor-operated mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Fitting interlocking module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-11
Installing the motor operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Mounting the Bowden cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-12
Optional motor disconnect switch on the front panel . . . 13-3 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-14
Updating the options label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
20 Arc chute covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
14 Indicators and operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Field installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
Limiting Access to OPEN/CLOSE Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Catalog numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
EMERGENCY OPEN button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Operations counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 21 Door sealing frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
15 Locking devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 22 Plexiglas breaker cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

Key Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
II
23 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1 Order numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-36
Preparation for maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2 Attaching the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-37
Opening the circuit breaker and Installing the arc chutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-37
discharging the closing spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2 Mechanical function test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-37
Removing the circuit breaker from the cradle . . . . . . . 23-3 Exchanging the primary disconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-38
Changing front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4 Exchanging the finger cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-38
Removing front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4 Catalog numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-39
Reinstalling the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4 Exchanging the stab tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-40
Checking arc chutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5 Catalog numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-41
Removing arc chutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6 Cleaning and greasing the circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . 23-42
Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6 Cleaning and greasing the cradle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-42
Installing arc chutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-7 24 Primary injection testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-1
Catalog numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-8 General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
Inspection of arc chute covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-9 Primary Injection Phase Current Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-4
Checking contact erosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10 Primary Injection Ground Fault Current Testing . . . . . . . 24-5
Replacing the internal current sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-11 Achieving Correct External Neutral Sensor Polarity . . . . 24-7
Removing vertical adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-13
Replacing the circuit breaker internal  25 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1
contact assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-21 Low-voltage circuit breakers disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-1
Removing front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-22 26 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1
Removing arc chutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-22
27 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1
Removing vertical adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-22
Removing pole assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-22 28 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1
Installing pole assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-27 29 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-1
Adjusting the contact wear indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-32
Attaching the vertical adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-33
III
1 Overview
1.1 Circuit Breaker
(1) Arc chute  (page 23-5)

(2) Carrying handle
(3) Identification tags
(4) Motor disconnect switch (option)  (page 13-3)
(5) Circuit breaker type label  (page 2-1)
(6) Spring charge indicator  (page 6-7)
(7) Mechanical "CLOSE" button
(8) Rated current value
(9) Racking pictogram
(10) Make-break operations counter (option)
(11) Spring charging lever  (page 6-4)
(12) Racking handle
(13) Racking shaft
(14) Options label  (page 2-1)
(15) Grounding terminal
(16) Position indicator  (page 6-2)
(17) Table for ground-fault protection  (page 9-12)
(18) Key lock for racking handle
(19) Mechanical release of racking handle
(20) Trip unit  (page 9-1)
(21) Rating Plug
(22) "OPEN" button or 
"EMERGENCY OPEN" mushroom pushbutton (option)
(23) "Ready-to-close" indicator  (page 6-7)
(24) Circuit breaker OPEN / CLOSED indicator  (page 6-7)
(25) Tripped indicator (reset button)  (page 6-9)
(26) Locking device "lock OPEN" (option)
(27) Front panel
(28) Secondary Disconnects
1–1
1.1 Cradle
(with optional accessories)
(3)
(1)
(7)
(14)
(5)
(11)
(6)
(12)
(13)
(4)
(9)
(8) (10) (7)
(1) Arc chute cover (option)

(2) Hole for crane hook
(3) Arc vent openings
(4) Shutter (option)
(5) Locking device shutter (standard for shutters)
(6) Mutual mechanical circuit breaker interlocking (option)
(7) Locking provision for guide rail
(8) Door interlock (option)
(9) Locking device in OPEN position (option)
(10) Cradle mounted locking device against closing the circuit breaker in disconnect position (option)
(11) Shutter operating device
(12) Rejection feature
(13) Option-related coding
(14) Secondary disconnects
1–2
2 Labels
2.1 Circuit breaker frame accessory label
(with terminal designations)
Charging Motor 1st Shunt Trip 2nd Shunt Trip Ready to Close Switch UVR Switch 52a 1st Aux. SW. 52b Bell Alarm
X5-1 (-) 240 VAC X6-13 (-) 240 VAC X9-1 (-) VAC X6-5 240 VAC X9-10 240 VAC X6-3 X6-11 X6-1 X6-9 240 VAC
X5-2 (+) 250 VDC X6-14 (+) 250 VDC X9-2 (+) VDC X6-6 4A X9-11 3A X6-4 X6-12 X6-2 X6-10 5A
X9-12 X9-14
Remote Close Coil UVR Remote Reset 1st Shunt Trip Switch Open Fuse Switch 52a 2nd Aux. SW. 52b
X6-7 (+) 120 VAC X5-11 (-) 120 VAC X8-13 (-) 120 VAC X9-7 240 VAC X9-5 240 VAC X5-5 X5-9 X5-3 X5-7
X6-8 (-) 125 VDC X5-12 (+) 125 VDC X8-14 (+) 125 VDC X9-8 3A X9-6 5A X5-6 X5-10 X5-4 X5-8
RESET TRIPPED
Siemens Industry, Inc X9-13
Grand Prairie, TX 75050, USA Made in Czech Republic / Assembled in USA 240 VAC , 10 A / 125 VDC , 0.5 A / 24 VDC , 3A (BELL ALARM SHOWN TRIPPED)
0131
2.2 Circuit breaker frame type label
(8) R LISTED
Low Voltage AC
Power Breaker Frame
(7) 12SZ
Frame Size: 2000A (1)

Frequency 50/60 Hz
kA Symm. 254 / 508 V

(2)
Inst. 100 kA
(6) Short Time 85 kA
(3)
kA Symm. 600V (2)
Inst. 85 kA
Short Time 85 kA
(3)
(5) Instr. Book &
Outline Dwg.: WLOPMAN1
(4)
Mfg. Date 2003-10-21
0132
ID-No. 31910220089
(1) Maximum rated current

(2) Max. rated operating voltages
(3) Rated short-circuit breaking capacity
(4) Manufacturing date
(5) Instruction book & outline drawings
(6) Max. rated short-time withstand current
(7) Rated frequency
(8) Certifications
2–1
2.3 Frame designation
WLL2332
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(1) Type of circuit breaker (WL)

(2) Siemens interrupting class
(3) Frame size
(4) No. of poles
(5) Maximum rated continuous current.
2.4 Trip unit designation
(1)
(2)
N450101000001
WLN., WLS., WLH., WLL., WLF., WLM.
(3)
0132-01
(4)
(1) Type
(2) Catalog number
(3) Can be used in the following types of circuit breakers
(4) Regulatory approvals on a separate label
2–2
2.5 Rating Plug label
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Catalog number

(2) Rated current of the circuit breaker
(3) Regulatory approvals on a separate label
2.6 Cradle type label
(1) WLGL2320
(2)
Continous Rating: 2000 A / 635 VAC
LV AC Power Circuit
Breaker Adapter
(3)
For use with C.B. frames type:
(4) WLL2A320/WLL2S320/WLL2D320/
WLL2Z320
Bz/Pos. 9344183 /20

ass.order 250000445789 (1 of 5)
Q.C.
(5)
0130
(1) Catalog number

(2) Rated current and voltage of the cradle
(3) UL listing mark
(4) Circuit breakers that can be used with this cradle
(5) Sales order, production order, cradle identification number
A second type label is attached to the baseplate inside the cradle or on one of its side walls.
2–3
3 Standard specifications
DANGER
Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment/property damage.
Turn off and lock out all power supplying this equipment before working on this device.
Only qualified personnel should work on this equipment, after becoming thoroughly familiar with all warnings, safety
notices, and maintenance procedures contained herein and on the devices.
The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent on proper handling, installation, operation and 
maintenance.
Qualified Personnel
For the purpose of this instruction manual and these product labels, a "qualified person" is one who is familiar with the
installation, construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved and who, in addition, has the following 
qualifications:
a) Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with
established safety practices.
b) Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety practices.
c) Is trained in rendering first aid.
The circuit breakers are suited for operation in enclosed spaces not subject to operating conditions aggravated by dust, corrosive vapors or
gases. Circuit breakers to be installed in dusty or damp locations must be appropriately enclosed.
The circuit breakers are in conformity with the following standards:
- ANSI C37.13
- ANSI C37.16
- ANSI C37.50
- UL 1066
The electronic trip units are in conformity with the following standards:
- ANSI C37.17
- UL 1066
The cradles are in conformity with the following standards:
- ANSI C37.20.1
- ANSI C37.51
- UL 1066
3–1
4 Packing and Lifting
4.1 Unpacking
Unpack the circuit breaker and inspect it for damage.

If the circuit breaker or cradle is to be installed at a later date:
they may only be stored and redispatched in the original packing.
NOTICE
Equipment Damage.
Placing the circuit breaker on its rear side may cause damage to the finger cluster assemblies.
When handling circuit breakers, do not place them on their rear side.
4.2 Weights
Weight
Fixed Mounted Circuit Breaker

Frame Size Draw-out circuit breaker Cradle
Circuit Breaker + Cradle
3-pole 4-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole
II 800 A 159 lb / 72 kg 210 lb / 95 kg 185 lb / 84 kg 112 lb / 51 kg 161 lb / 73 kg Only lift separately
II 2000 A 177 lb / 80 kg 227 lb / 103 kg 203 lb / 92 kg 128 lb / 58kg 181 lb / 82 kg Only lift separately
II Fused 258 lb / 117 kg not available not available 150 lb / 68 kg not available Only lift separately
III 360 lb / 163 kg 434 lb / 197 kg 426 lb / 193 kg 306 lb / 139 kg 410 lb / 186 kg Only lift separately
III Fuse
325 lb / 147 kg not available not available 306 lb / 139 kg not available Only lift separately
Carriage
4–1
4.3 Lifting with a crane
DANGER
Heavy Equipment.
Improper lifting will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment/property damage.
Never lift a circuit breaker or cradle above personnel.Follow instructions for use of lifting bar assembly. 
Use OSHA/NIOSH approved crane equipment and personal protection equipment for lifting/moving the circuit breakers
and cradles.
Circuit Breaker Cradle
ft
>3
max.  ½“ rope
NOTICE
Lifting a frame size III or frame size II 4-pole cradle with a breaker inside may result in distortion of the cradle.
Remove the frame size III breaker from the cradle before lifting.
4–2
4.4 Lifting with a Lifting Bar Assembly
DANGER
Heavy Equipment.
Never lift a circuit breaker or cradle above personnel.Follow instructions for use of lifting bar assembly. 
and cradles.
4.4.1 Lifting bar assembly (3-pole)
(1) (2)
0610_nu
(5) (4) (3)
(1) Locking position for circuit breaker in frame size II

(2) Locking position for circuit breaker in frame size III
(3) Receptacle for circuit breaker carrying handle FS II / III
(4) Receptacle for circuit breaker carrying handle
(5) Hook for fuse carriage
4.4.2 Lifting bar assembly (4-pole)
(1) (2)
(3)
(1) Locking position for circuit breaker in frame size II
(2) Locking position for circuit breaker in frame size III
(3) Receptacle for circuit breaker carrying handle FS II / III
NOTE
Always lock the lifting bar assembly symmetrically on both sides.
4–3
4.4.3 Lifting the circuit breaker
2 3
2 3
0610-1_nu
1
0614_1
Lifting eye
4.4.4 Lifting the fuse carriage (frame size III)
2
2
0610-1_nu
4–4
4 5
4
3
3
0613_1
0613_2
Catalog No
Lifting beam for circuit breaker and cradle (3-pole) WLLFT
Lifting beam for circuit breaker and cradle (4-pole) WLLFT4
Portable hoist for use with the lifting beam WLHOIST
4–5
5 Installation
DANGER
DANGER
Heavy Equipment.
Never lift a circuit breaker, fuse carriage, or cradle above personnel. Follow instructions for use of lifting bar assembly.
and cradles.
WARNING
High speed moving parts.
Can cause serious personal injury.
Discharge the closing spring before inspection and before carrying out any work on the circuit breaker.
5–1
5.1 Mounting
5.1.1 Mounting position
WARNING
Heavy Equipment
Use care when racking the breaker into the disconnect position. When a draw-out circuit breaker is mounted tilting toward
the front side, it is possible that the circuit breaker may slide out on the rails.
 30°  30°
 30°  30°
5–2
5.1.2 Mounting on horizontal surface - 
Mounting tolerances
The circuit breaker must be mounted on a rigid, level surface, capable of supporting the weight of the breaker, cradle, and associated busbar
components. The maximum amount of offset in the mounting plane is 3/64“ (1mm).
3/64” (1mm)
0139
(1)
(1)
(1) 4 bolts (5/16“ diameter) + belleville washers + nuts
NOTICE
Damage to finger clusters.
Improperly aligned bussing at the terminal connections may affect the position of the bus stabs. Misaligned bus stabs may
result in damage to the finger clusters during circuit breaker rack-in.
Do not distort the cradle terminal connections when connecting to the main bus.
5–3
5.1.3 Cubicle and ventilation
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Upper ventilation opening

(2) Insulating liner use NEMA GPO-3, min. 0.094“ thick or comparable material
(3) Lower ventilation opening
Insulating liner
Minimal cubicle dimensions Cubicle ventilation
Frame dimensions
Frame Interrupting
rating Top Bottom
size Class Width W1 Height H Depth D1 Width W2 Depth D2
(A) (square (square
(inch) (inch) (inch) (inch) (inch)
inch) inch)
800
1600 N, S, H, L 22 22.51) 19.5 18.5 10.5 not required
II
2000
3200 N, S, H, L 22 22.51) 19.5 18.5 10.5 55 552)
800
II Fused 1600 F 22 22.51) 25 18.5 10.5 143 1372)
2000
4000 48
H, L 32 22.51) 19.5 28.5 10.5 882)
5000 (2 x 24)
III 3200
48
4000 M 32 30 19.5 28.5 10.5 882)
(2 x 24)
5000
3200
III Fused 4000 F 32 22.51) 19.5 28.5 10.5 88 882)
5000
1600
not required
II 4-pole 2000 N, S, H 32 22.51) 19.5 28.5 10.5
3200 55 552)
III 4-pole 5000 H, L 42 22.51) 19.5 39 10.5 48 (2 x 24) 882)
1) Cubicle height given for use with insulating liner on cubicle top or cradles equipped with optional cover
2) Provided by cradle holes
5–4
5.2 Main terminal connections
For main terminal dimensions of individual frame sizes, refer to:  Frame sizes / dimension drawings (page 7-1)
The main terminals and connectors are intended for busbar connection with NEMA hole patterns.The number and size of the busbars con-
nected to the circuit breaker must be selected per ANSI C.37.20.1 in order to meet the test requirements according to ANSI C.37.51
depending on the rated current, defined by the Rating Plug. Different bussing in a given frame size may be applicable.
DANGER
5.2.1 Cradle connections
Drawout Circuit breaker Connections to Line/Load side cradle connectors
Number of Available Busbar

Frame Size In max Busbar cross-section Number of holes
Mounting Positions
800 A / 1600 A 1-3
II 2000 A 2-4 4“ x ¼“1) 4
3200 A 3-5
III 4000 A / 5000 A 5-7 5“ x ¼“2) 6
1) The terminal permits the use of 2“ x ¼“ busbars is possible.

5.2.2 Horizontal connections for 4-pole fixed mount breakers
Fixed mount Circuit Breaker Connection to Line/Load side horizontal terminals

Mounting Positions
II 800 A / 1600 A / 2000 A 1-4 4“ x ¼“1) 2
5–5
5.2.3 Vertical connections for 4-pole fixed mount breakers
Fixed mount Circuit Breaker Connection to Line/Load side terminals with vertical connectors

Mounting Positions
II 800 A / 1600 A / 2000 A 1-4 4“ x ¼“1) 2
II 3200 A3) 1-4 4“ x ¼“1) 2
III 4000 A / 5000 A3) 5-7 5“ x ¼“2) 6

3) The FSII 3200 A and FSIII 4000 A, 5000A require vertical connectors.
(4)
DANGER
5.3 Bus connections to the cradle
Clean the main conductor connection

(plated busbars)
5–6
Securing line and load-side busbars
0058_u
Use grade 5 bolts 1/2“ and Belleville washers. Tighten to a torque of 70 Nm / 50 lb-ft.
5–7
Recommended support for bus connections to the cradle
The bus connections to all poles should be braced together, line and load side separately.
Dimension x
Rated breaking current
Frame size
(kA)
(mm) (inch)
50 / 65 250 10
II 85 200 8
100 200 8
II fused 200 200 8
85 /100 200 8
III
130 / 150 100 4
III fused 200 200 8
These distances are recommendations and are not construction specifications. All designs should be type tested according to 
ANSI C37.20.1 and ANSI C37.51 for design validation.
5–8
5.3.1 Application and configuration of fused circuit breakers
5.3.1.1 Integrally fused and non-integrally fused circuit breakers
Frame size II (800 A through 2000 A) circuit breakers are equipped with fuses, which are fitted directly to the circuit breaker.
Due to size and heat constraints, the frame size III (3200 A through 5000 A frames) are not integrally fused. The fuses are mounted in a
separate fuse carriage which has the same outer dimensions as the circuit breaker and are connected in series with the associated circuit
breaker. The fuse carriage and frame size III fuse switch breaker system can be mounted in the same vertical section, or adjacent to one
another, but it is important that the interconnecting bus be kept as short as possible. The suitability of the design must be verified by type
testing.
Siemens fused circuit breakers are not sensitive to the infeed direction. The circuit breakers (or the combination of circuit breaker and fuse
carriage) can be fed from either the upper or the lower terminals.
5.3.1.2 Open fuse lockout
Every Siemens fused circuit breakers (or fused switch) is equipped with an open fuse lockout (OFLO). The purpose of the OFLO device is to
open the circuit breaker (or switch) and hold the device in the trip-free position until after the primary fuses have been replaced.
For frame size III fused devices, additional control wiring is required to interconnect the OFLO device within the fuse carriage and the OFLO
device within the circuit breaker (switch)..
NOTICE
Equipment damage.
Incorrect connection of the open-fuse lockout will prevent the circuit breaker from tripping when a fuse in the fuse carriage
responds. Polarity must be observed.
Connect the OFLO as shown below.
Fuse carriage
X9-4 X9-3
X9-4 X9-3
Fused circuit breaker
5–9
5.3.1.3 Key interlocking of fuse carriage and FS III fused circuit breaker
The racking mechanism for the fuse carriage is interlocked with the associated fused circuit breaker. In order to rack the fuse carriage, the
associated fused circuit breaker must be open, and the KIRK key must be removed from the circuit breaker, which unlocks the racking
mechanism of the fuse carriage.
line or load
(1)
(3)
(2)
line or load
(1) Fuse carriage FS III

(2) Circuit breaker FS III
(3) Interconnenction between cradles, according to the rated current of the circuit breaker.
5 – 10
5.4 Secondary wiring
Terminal assignment
 (page 8-1)
Cross-sections
Connection type Strip conductors 1x 2x
Screw clamp terminal 20 -14 AWG1) 20 -14 AWG 1)

(SIGUT system) 0.5 - 2.5 mm2 1) 0.5 - 1.5 mm2 1)
7 mm 1/4“
20 -14 AWG 1) 20 -14 AWG 2)

Spring clamp terminal
0.5 - 2.5 mm2 1) 0.5 - 2.5 mm2 2)
7 mm 1/4“
14 - 16 AWG
Recommendation:
AMP, PIDG series
Catalog No. 50881
Ring terminal system
10 AWG
Recommendation:
Siemens part
Catalog No. WL10RL
1) Use of wire end ferrules (crimp style) is possible

1 x up to14 AWG tube-type without insulating sleeve
1 x up to 16 AWG tube-type with insulating sleeve
2 x up to 16 AWG tube-type with insulating sleeve, twin wire end ferrule
2) 2 x up to 14 AWG tube-type without insulating sleeve
2 x up to 16 AWG tube-type with insulating sleeve
5 – 11
5.4.1 Breaker Secondary Disconnects
Arrangement
(1)
(2)
X9 X8 COM15 X6 X5
COM16
(1) Arc chute

(2) Secondary disconnect block
Field installation
(2)
2 3
(1)
4
0173-06
(1) Dummy block

TX 8
(3) or
5
0173-09
PH 1
6
0,7 Nm
6 lb-in
(3) Secondary disconnect adapter block for high arc chutes.
5 – 12
Connecting secondary wiring
Spring clamp terminal
3,0 x 0,6
1/8“
5.4.2 Cradle Secondary Disconnect Blocks
Field installation
(1)
(2)
(1) Cradle with sliding contact modules

(2) Secondary disconnect blocks
Disassembly
(1)
1
5 – 13
For the screw clamp terminal, a low profile, one-piece, sliding disconnect module is also available.
3,0 x 0,6
0,5 Nm
4 lb-in
0769
5.4.3 Secondary disconnect terminal blocks
Versions
(1) (2)
PH 1
3,0 x 0,6 0,5 Nm

1/8“ 4 lb-in
0,5 Nm (3)
4 lb-in
(4)
(1) Screw clamp terminal system

(2) Ring terminal system
(3) Insulated ring terminal
(4) Screws ANSI B 18.6.3 #4
(5)
3,0 x 0,6
1/8“
(5) Spring clamp terminal system

2 terminals per contact
5 – 14
Attaching the secondary disconnect blocks
(1)
1
2
(2)
(1) Secondary disconnect blocks

(2) Draw-out circuit breaker: Cradle secondary disconnect block
5.4.4 Wiring in cradle
NOTICE
Impermissable area for wires:
Damage to wires in this area.
(1)
(2)
(3)
0106-01_nu
(1) Arcing space*)

(2) Arcing openings
(3) Mounting location for mechanical interlock
*) If arc chute covers are installed, the wires of the secondary disconnect blocks must not be laid on these covers.
5 – 15
5.4.5 Catalog numbers
Catalog No.
Circuit breakers secondary disconnect block WLCNMD
Secondary disconnect extension WLCNMDA
Screw clamp terminal (SIGUT) system WLGAUXPLUGP
Spring clamp terminal WLGAUXPLUGT
Ring terminal system WLGAUXPLUGR
Cradle secondary disconnect block WLGDSCN
Blanking cover WLGDAUXPLUG
Ring terminal crimp lug for AWG 10 wire WL10RL
Cradle secondary disconnect block with integrated low profile

WLGAUXPLUGL
screw clamp terminal block
5 – 16
6 Commissioning
6.1 Preparation of draw-out circuit breaker
6.1.1 Inserting the circuit breaker into the cradle
NOTE
Remove padlocks from the shutter and place the locking device in the stowed position  (page 15-19).
Check circuit breaker position indicator/

Draw out guide rails
green
1) The circuit breaker can only be pushed in when the indicator displays "DISCON".
2) Pull out guide rails to the end-stop.
Place the circuit breaker into the guide rails and push it into the cradle up to the disconnected position. Close cubicle door.
3 4
4
4
6–1
6.1.2 Positions of the circuit breaker in the cradle
Primary Secondary
Diagram Positon indicator Cubicle Door Shutter
Circuit Circuit
(2)
(1)
Withdrawn
disconnected disconnected open closed
position
(4)
green
(3)
Disconnected 
disconnected disconnected closed closed
position
green
blue
Test position disconnected connected closed closed
red
Connected 
connected connected closed open
position
(1) Secondary circuit

(2) Primary circuit
(3) Cubicle door
(4) Shutter
6–2
6.1.3 Unlocking the racking handle / withdrawing the racking handle
4
Hold
1
2 3
5
1 OPEN circuit breaker
2 Push the crank inwards
3 Pull out the handle
4 Lift and hold the control lever
5 Pull out the crank
6.1.4 Racking circuit breaker into connected position
Stop
red
Position indicator blue
green
6.1.5 Inserting racking handle
1
3
4
NOTICE
Racking Handle Damage.
Turning the racking handle beyond the stop will cause damage to the racking mechanism.
When the stop is reached, rotate the racking handle counter-clockwise until it can be pushed inwards.
6–3
6.2 Charge the closing spring
Charging manually
WARNING
Heavy equipment
May result in serious injury and/or property damage.
Secure the circuit breaker before charging it manually (e.g. during service on the work bench).
9x
(1)
0727
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
n
F Handle force
n Number of strokes
(1) Spring charged
NOTE
To charge the spring mechanism, grip the handle firmly and carry out each stroke evenly, moving the lever down as far as it will go. 
Despite a significant increase in the required actuating force, the lever must be moved as far in the ninth stroke as in the first eight.
When the closing spring is fully charged, the lever can be moved without resistance.
6–4
Condition after 9 strokes:
(1) (2)
0063-1 0063-2
(1) incomplete stroke, repeat stroke completely

(2) completely charged
Charging with a motor-operated mechanism
The motor-operated mechanism starts automatically when the control voltage is applied. The motor switches off
automatically when the charging process is completed.
The motor will re-engage immediately following spring discharge (closing operation).
 Installing the motor operator (page 13-1)
6–5
6.3 Check list for commissioning
DANGER
Action required q
Verify the circuit breaker is OPEN
Verify the Rating Plug is installed

 Rating Plug (page 9-43)
Verify the TRIP indicator is reset
Set the trip unit to appropriate values

 Trip units (page 9-1)
Apply secondary and control voltages
Close the cubicle door
Rack circuit breaker into connected position
Push in the racking handle
Charge closing spring
Ensure the following conditions exist
Undervoltage release energized
Locking devices not activated
Indicators
6–6
6.4 Closing the circuit breaker
Indicators
CLOSE button Remote activation
or
Indicators Without motor-operated mechanism
With motor-operated mechanism

after 10 seconds
(The closing spring will be recharged by the motor-operated mechanism immediately after the circuit breaker has closed)
6.5 Opening the circuit breaker
OPEN button Remote activation
or
NOTE
The minimum time interval between ON- and OFF-signal of the Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers 3WL shall not be shorter than
100 ms.
6–7
6.6 Tripping
Tripped by Trip unit
Bell Alarm (tripped) indicator
S24*
Bell Alarm X9 - 12 X9 - 14
RESET TRIPPED
X9 - 13
(BELL ALARM SHOWN TRIPPED)
Breaker indicators
* The breaker is untripped, and the Bell Alarm is shown reset
6–8
6.7 Reclosing a circuit breaker tripped by the trip unit
NOTE
The reason for tripping can be displayed using the "QUERY" button on the trip unit. This is stored for at least two days, provided that the
trip unit was activated for at least 10 minutes before tripping.
1
Find reason for
tripping
2
Indicator Overload in Overload in neutral Short circuit: Short circuit: Ground fault trip
main conductor conductor short-time-delay trip instantaneous trip
- Check downstream load - Inspect switchgear

- Check trip unit settings - Check downstream load
3
Find and rem-
edy cause
Inspect contact system for possible damage

4  Maintenance (page 23-1)
Inspect circuit
breaker
5
Clear trip cause
6–9
With mechanical reclosing lockout
(optional)
6
Reset Bell
Alarm
Electric remote reset of Bell Alarm  (page 10-5)

(optional)
Manual reset of reclosing lockout, Bell Alarm
and tripped indicator  (page 10-2)
Without motor-operated 
mechanism
7
Indicators
Charge the closing spring (page 6-4)
Closing the circuit breaker (page 6-7)
6 – 10
6.8 Re-commissioning after fused tripping (Not applicable for 4-pole)
6.8.1 Measures
Frame size II Frame size III
1
Remove fused circuit breaker/
fuse carriage
2
Check downstream loads
Identify and remedy cause of
Check switchgear
tripping
3
Inspect main contacts of
fused circuit breaker
 Checking contact
erosion (page 23-10)
4
Replace fuses
5
Insert fused circuit breaker/
fuse carriage
6 – 11
Frame size II Frame size III
7
Reset reclosing lockout
9X
8
Charge closing spring
9
Close breaker
6 – 12
6.8.2 Replacing the fuses
Frame size II
- Remove draw-out circuit breaker from cradle

- Replace all fuses.
Remove all fuses
2
3
PH 1
Size
5
4
6 – 13
7
12
6
11
10
PH 1 Size
13
10
Install fuse
7
4
9 (1)
5
(2)
Size
PH 1 1 (3) 10
(4)
6
3,2 Nm 4 70 Nm
28 lb-in 50 ft-lb
3
(5) 8
2
(1) M12 socket head cap screw
(2) Belleville washer
(3) Ring terminal
(4) Threaded plate
(5) 2 x self-tapping collar screws M4
10
Size
5
8 Nm
71 lb-in
11
11
6 – 14
13
12
PH 1
14
Frame size III
(1)
(2)
1 4
2
3
(1) Circuit breaker in cubicle
(2) Fuse carriage in cubicle
- Rack out and remove the fuse carriage.
6 – 15
Replacing the fuse
6
2
0635-1
4 3
Size
10 5 4
60 Nm
45 ft-lb (1) (2) (3) (5)
(1) Socket head cap screw M14x50

(2) Washer
(3) Fuse
(4) Socket head cap screw M5x12 (6 ± 0,5 Nm)
(5) Countersunk screw M6x16 (8 ± 1 Nm)
1 Loosen 2 screws, remove the cover

2 Remove crank with retaining ring from racking shaft
3 Pull out racking shaft on the other side
4 Remove 6 screws securing the racking assembly
5 Take out the complete racking assembly
6 Replace the fuses
Re-assembly is carried out in the opposite order.
- Insert the fuse carriage and rack it into the connected position
1
4
3
2
6 – 16
Frame Size Fuse Rating Fuse Kit (3 fuses)
400 A WLCLF0400
600 A WLCLF0600
800 A WLCLF0800
900 A WLCLF0900
1000 A WLCLF1000
FS II
1200 A WLCLF1200
1600 A WLCLF1600
2000 A WLCLF2000
2500 A WLCLF2500
3000 A WLCLF3000
FS III 6000 A WLCLF6000
6 – 17
6.9 Removing from service
Draw-out circuit breaker
1
OPEN the circuit breaker
Secondary Circuit
Position Indicator
2
Disconnect secondary
circuits
green
3
Depress the CLOSE button
4
Depress the OPEN button
5
Indicators
6 – 18
6.10 Troubleshooting
Draw-out
Disturbance Possible Cause(s) Remedy
breaker
Circuit breaker cannot be 1. Spring not charged Charge spring

closed.
X Circuit breaker not ready 
to close.
2. Undervoltage release not

X "Ready-to-close" indicator Energize undervoltage release
energized.
shows:
3. Mechanical open fuse lock-out For fused circuit breakers:
X effective Replace defective fuses and press
reset button
4. Key lock engaged 

X (optional accessory) Unlock
5. Padlocks installed
X Remove padlocks
6. "EMERGENCY OPEN" 
Release "EMERGENCY OPEN" 
X button engaged in operating 
button by rotating it
position (accessories)
7. Lockout effective against closing
X when cubicle door is open  Close cubicle door
(accessories)
8. Electronic trip unit missing or
X incorrectly installed Install electronic trip unit properly
9. Racking handle withdrawn Rack circuit breaker into disconnected,

X test or connect position, unlatch crank
and push crank fully in
10. Mutual mechanical circuit breaker Open second circuit breaker or rack
X interlocks effective (accessories) into disconnected position
6 – 19
Fixed-mounted Draw-out
Disturbance Possible cause(s) Remedy
breaker circuit breaker
Circuit breaker cannot be 1. Closing coil not energized or

X X closed.  incorrectly energized Check or apply correct voltage
Circuit breaker ready to close.

"Ready-to-close" indicator:
2. The secondary disconnects

X Plug in the secondary disconnects
have been removed
Circuit breaker cannot be 1. Racking mechanism of circuit

moved from the withdrawn breaker not in disconnected  Rack the mechanism into
X position into the disconnected (DISCON) position (Check disconnected position 
position circuit breaker position indica- (green position indicator)
tor)
Circuit breaker cannot be fitted The circuit breaker is not rated for
in the guide rails 1. Factory mounted coding of  use in this cradle. Replace with the
X circuit breaker and cradle does proper circuit breaker (permissible
not match. circuit breakers are listed on the
cradle type label).
When racking from the discon-

nected into the test position,
2. Not a fault 
X the circuit breaker does not Continue racking
(functional property)
move during the first 6
rotations (approximately)
Press "OPEN" button and pull 

X 1. Circuit breaker is closed racking handle block out
Racking handle cannot be
drawn out 2. Cubicle door not completely
X closed (Locking device as Close cubicle door
accessory)
Rack circuit breaker into discon-

Racking handle cannot be
X 1. Racking handle is interlocked nected, test or connected position,
pushed in
unlatch crank and push it fully in
1. Closed circuit breaker is 

X preventing opening of  Open the circuit breaker
Cubicle door cannot be
cubicle door
opened (door interlock as
accessory) 2. Circuit breaker in connected Rack circuit breaker into test or
X position disconnected position
6 – 20
7 Frame sizes / dimension drawings
7.1 Frame size II Drawout (3-Pole and 4-Pole)

8.35 [212.0] 7.89 [200.5]
5.2461 [133.3]
Top ventilation area

(must remain unobstructed)
Side ventilation area

Arc chute cover 10.63 [270]
(both sides - must remain
(optional accessory)
unobstructed) 5.47 [139]
Wiring channel
1.75 [44.5]
0.53 [ 13.5]
4.00 [101.6] 20.34 [516.7]

10.83 [275.0]
12.89 [327.5]
7.37 [187.3]
0.75 [19.1]
10.38 [263.6] 10.31 [262]

9.25 [235.0]
1.75 [44.5]
4.86 [123.5] 5.18 [131.6]
2.88 [73.1] 2.99 [76.0]
1.75 [44.5]
2.31 [58.7] 3.74 [95] 1.85 [47.1]

3-pole cradle 3.27 [83.0] 8.46 [215.0]
8.86 [225] 2.37 [60.1]
2.24 [57.0]
4-pole cradle Ground Strap 3.94 [100]
6.97 [177.1] 18.62 [473.0] (optional accessory)
9.06 [230]
19.41 [493.0]
19.53 [496.0] 7.20 [183]
Middle escutcheon 12.32 [313]
19.65 [499.0] 18.11 [460]

Center escutcheon 23.23 [590]
Bottom ventilation area

(to remain unobstructed) 5.59 [142.0]
Mounting holes
Ø0.35 [Ø9.0]
18.90 [480.0] 6.89 [175.0]

22.13 [562]
13.78 [350.0]
12.83 [326.0]
5.31 [135.0]
Ø 0.55 [14.0]; Hole provided as

standrad grounding provision.
(Grounding strap is optional
factory provided accessory).
6.69 [170.0] 2.28 [58.0]

8.19 [208.0] 8.66 [220.0]
7–1
3200 A 2000 A 800/1600 A
5.25 [133.3] 5.25 [133.3]

5.25 [133.3]
0.25 [6.4] 5.25 [133.3] 5.25 [133.3] 5.25 [133.3] 5.25 [133.3]
5.25 [133.3] 0.25 [6.4] 5.75 [146.1]
0.25 [6.3] 0.25 [6.3]
0.25 [6.3] 0.25 [6.3]

0.25 [6.4]
5.25 [133.3] 5.25 [133.3] 5.75 [146.0]
1.75
0.53 [ [44.5]
13.5]
4.00
[101.6]
7.37
[187.3]
10.38 0.75
[263.6] [19.0]
9.25
[235.0]
1.75
[44.5]
5.18
[131.6]
3.74
[95.0] 2.88
[73.1] 1.75
[44.5]
5.25 5.25
[133.3] [133.3] 2.31 18.62
[58.7] [473.0]
6.97
[177.1]
7–2
HORIZONTAL MAIN VERTICAL MAIN
BUS CONNECTORS BUS CONNECTORS
1.75
[44.5]
1.75
[44.5]
5.25
[133.3]
1.75
[44.5]
5.25
5.25
[133.3] [133.3] 5.25
[133.3]
1.75
[44.5]
0.50
[12.7]
0.75
[19.0]
HORIZONTAL MAIN VERTICAL MAIN

BUS CONNECTORS BUS CONNECTORS
1.75
Ø0.53 [44.5]
[Ø13.5]
4.00
[101.6]
0.50
[12.7]
7.5
[190.5]
10.38 0.75
[263.6] [19.0]
9.25
[235.0]
1.75
[44.5]
3.75 0.50
3.75 [12.7]
[95.2] [95.3] 2.88
[73.1] 1.75
[44.5]
6.97
[177.1]
5.25 5.25
[133.3] [133.3] 2.31 18.62
[58.7] [473.0]
6.97
[177.1]
NOTE:
ROTATABLE MAIN BUS CONNECTORS ARE ONLY AVAILABLE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
(1) ONLY ACCEPTABLE FOR 3-POLE VERSIONS
(2) ONLY ACCEPTABLE FOR FS2 800A-2000A
(3) ONLY ACCEPTABLE FOR SHORT-CIRCUIT RATINGS OF 85kAIC OR LESS
7–3
Lifting Point (Cradle
only) Do not lift by other Lifting Point (Cradle and
points. Breaker) Do not lift by other
points.
0.75
[19.0]
Minimum free space for

19.13 6.43 circuit breaker racking
[486.0] Closed door racking [163.4]
15.7 Withdrawn position

[398]
34.80
[884]
7–4
7.2 Frame size II fused
7–5
13.35 7.89
[339.2] [200.5]
Top ventilation area (must

remain unobstructed)
5.25
[133.4]
CL
5.25
[133.4] 0.25
[6.3]
0.25
[6.4]
CL
1.75
[44.5]
Ø0.53
Ø[13.5]
4.00
[101.6]
7.37
[187.3]
9.25 0.75
[235.0] [19.1]
1.75
[44.5]
10.38
[263.6]
5.18
[131.6]
2.88
[73.2]
1.75
[44.5] 2.31
5.25 5.25 [58.7]
[133.4] [133.4]
1.75
[44.5]
23.63
[600.1]
6.97
[177.1]
7–6
7–7
7.3 Frame size II, fixed-mounted version
5.12 [130.0]
Fixed mount versions are only 5.12 [130.0] 5.12 [130.0]
2.56 [65.0]
available with rear vertical connector
0.79 [20.0]
for FS2 3200A and FS3 4000A/5000A
1.57 [40.0]
M8
5.91
[150.0]
required space for aux. connectors

including wire-channel
0.39 [10] up to 1600A
press-in-nut
0.59 [15] up to 2000A
M8 (metric thread)
0.53
[ 13.5]
18.70
[475.0]
4.92 17.78
[125.0] 7.50 1.75 [451.5]
[190.5] [44.4]
5.91
[150.0] 3.75
[95.3]
0.75 [19.0] 5.91 [150.0] 0.79 breaker front cover

0.39 [10] up to 1600A
1.77 [45.0] [20.0] 22.44 [570.0]
0.59 [15] up to 2000A 0.67 [17.0]
23.23 [590.0]
10.17 [258.4]
4.25 [108.0] large door cut-out [with edge protector)
4.45 [113.0] door cut-out, middle escutcheon visible
4.61 [117.0] minimal door cut-out, only center escutcheon visible
5.00 [127.0]
Rear View
20.83 [529.0] M8
(1) 5.12 [130.0]
0.16 [4.0] 5.12 [130.0]
0.35 [ 9.0]
5.91 [150.0]
9.06 [230.0] 4.33 [110.0]
0.79 [20.0]
0.16 [4.0]
22.44 [570.0]
8.58 [218.0]
(1) = Slots 0.2 [5] for insulation barriers
7–8
7.4 Frame size II, door cut-outs
Door cut-out and mounting holes for edge protector Door cut-out (with edge protector)
(door sealing frame)
breaker front panel breaker front panel
R0.39 (Max. radii, 4 plc's)

[R10.0]
13.38
[339.9]
2.74
[69.5]
0.83
Ø1.42 1.40 [21.1]
[Ø36.0] [35.5]
4.45
[113.0]
5.71
[144.9]
11.41
[289.9]
Door cut-out Minimal door cut-out

(middle escutcheon visible) (only center escutcheon visible)
breaker front panel breaker front panel
R0.08 R0.08
[R2.0] (Max. radii, 4 plcs) [R2.0]
(Max. radii, 4 plcs)
10.98 10.98
[278.9] [278.9]
4.78
[121.5] 4.78
[121.5]
5.19
[131.9] 1.93
[49.0]
10.39 5.63
[263.9] [142.9]
Additional information on: Cut-outs for "through-door racking" with Door sealing frame (page 21-1) is given in Chapter 21.
Cut-outs for attaching the Plexiglas cover are shown in Chapter 22.
7–9
7.5 Frame size III, fixed-mounted version
Fixed-mounted versions are only available as

4-pole with vertical connections.

press-in nut M 10
(metric thread)
1.20 [30.5]
1.75 [44.4]
0.55 [ 14.0]
20.67 [525.0]
17.77 [451.5]
7.50 [190.5]
1.75 [44.4]
1.75 [44.4]
3.75 [95.2]
breaker front cover

1.75 [44.4] 5.91 [150.0]
35.04 [890.0]
0.79 [20.0]
1.77 [45.0] 35.98 [914.0]
11.28 [286.5]
4.25 [108.0] large door cut-out [with edge protector)
4.45 [113.0] door cut-out, middle escutcheon visible
4.61 [117.0] minimal door cut-out, only center escutcheon visible
5.00 [127.1]
Top view vertical connection Rear view
breaker front cover 35.08 [891]

33.47 [850.0]
8.27 [210.0] 8.27 [210.0]
0.16 [4.0] (1)
0.79 [20.0]
9.04 [229.5] 4.33 [110.0]

5.91 [150.0]
0.43 [ 11.0]
M10
8.27 [210.0] 8.27 [210.0] 8.27 [210.0]

0.26 [6.7]
(gap)
0.25 [6.4]
(copper bar) breaker front cover
7 – 10
7.6 Frame size III Drawout (3-Pole and 4-Pole)
8.35 [212.0]
Top ventilation area

(must remain unobstructed) 7.89 [200.5]
10.63 [270.0]
Side ventilation area Arc chute cover
(both sides - must remain (optional accessory) Wiring channel
10.24 [260.0]
unobstructed) 5.47 [139.0] 1.85 [47.0]
Optional ground strap
20.34 [516.7]
7.37 [187.2]
10.26 [260.5]
5.18 [131.6]
2.31 [58.7]
3-pole cradle
3.39 [86.0] 8.54 [217.0]
8.46 [215.0]
2.24 [57.0] 16.81 [427.0]
4-pole cradle 8.74 [222.0]
6.75 [171.5] 18.62 [473.0] 17.01 [432.0]
19.41 [493.0] 12.01 [305.0]
20.28 [515.0]
19.53 [496.0] 27.72 [704.0]
Middle escutcheon 35.98 [914.0]
19.65 [499.0]
Center escutcheon
11.61 [295.0] 9.84 [250.0] Door panel

Ø 0.35 [Ø 9.0]
Mounting holes
2.28 [58.0]
6.69 [170.0]
8.66 [220.0]
8.19 [208.0]
Ø 0.55 [14.0]; Hole provided as

standrad grounding provision.
(Grounding strap is optional
factory provided accessory).
Bottom ventilation area

(to remain unobstructed
23.23 [590.0]
for 5000A circuit breaker)
31.50 [800.0]
7 – 11
8.27 [210.0] 8.27 [210.0] 8.27 [210.0] 3.75 [95.2]
7 – 12
7 – 13
7.7 Frame size III, fuse carriage
7 – 14
7 – 15
7.8 Frame size III, door cut-outs
Door cut-out (with edge protector)
RO.39 (Max. radii, 4 plc´s)

[RIO.O]
13.39
[340.2]
2.74
[69.5]
0.83
[21.1]
ø1.42
[ø36.0]
1.40
[35.5]
4.45
[113.1]
5.71
[145.1]
11.42
[290.1]
Door cut-out Minimal door cut-out

(middle escutecheon visible) (only center escutecheon visible)
[R0.08]
(Max. radii, 4 plc´s)
[R2.0]
10.99 10.99
[279.1] [279.1]
4.79 4.79
[121.6] [121.6]
5.20 1.93
[132.1] [49.0]
10.40 5.63
[264.1] [143.1]
7 – 16
Additional information on: Cut-outs for "through-door racking" with Door sealing frame (page 21-1) are shown in Chapter 21.
Cut-outs for attaching the plexiglass cover are shown in Chapter 22
7 – 17
7.9 External sensor for neutral conductor
WLNCT2
7 – 18
WLNCT3
7 – 19
Iron Core: WLG800NMCT23, WLG1200NMCT23, WLG1600NMCT23, WLG2000NMCT23, WLG2500NMCT23,
WLG3000NMCT23, WLG3200NMCT23, WLG4000NMCT23, WLG5000NMCT23, WLG6000NMCT23, WLGNMDGCT23
7.10 Further dimension drawings
- Door sealing frame  (page 21-1)

- Shrouding cover  (page 22-2)
Additional information on: Cut-outs for "through-door racking" with Door sealing frame (page 21-1) are shown in Chapter 21.
Cut-outs for attaching the plexiglass cover are shown in Chapter 22
7 – 20
8 Circuit diagrams
8.1 Terminal assignment

ANSI
Internal Terminals External
C37.2
device
#
X9
14
30
Bell Alarm S24 13
12
11 52CS
Signalling switch for 2nd shunt trip
10
9 52CC LT / (+) Control power
8
Signaling switch for remote tripping 52CS
7
6
Open Fuse Indication S26
5
Open Fuse Lockout Device (FS III Only) 4 X9.4
OFLO Fuse carriage FS III
3 X9.3
2nd shunt trip F2 2 LT / (+)
TC 52TC Control power
1 N / (-)
X8
14 LT / (+)
Remote reset Bell Alarm & tripped indicator F7 BA 79 Control power
13 N / (-)
External Iron Core Ground Fault Sensor S2 12
External Iron Core Ground Fault Sensor S1 11
External Air Core Neutral Sensor S2 10
External Air Core Neutral Sensor S1 Short terminals, if no Neutral sensor
9
External voltage transformer Com 8
External voltage transformer L3 Phase A
7
Phase B
External voltage transformer L2 6
Phase C
External voltage transformer L1 5
0 V DC 4
24 V DC Input
24 V DC 3
CUB + 2 Terminating resistor, 120 Ω, 0.5 W if no
CUB - 1 external CubicleBUS module is connected
COM15/16, otherwise empty

X7
X6
14 LT / (+)
1st Shunt Trip. TC 52TC / 86 Control power
13 N / (-)
12
S1 a 52a
11
10
S1 b 52b
9
CC
Closing Coil CC 8 N / (-)
52CC Control power
7 LT / (+)
“Ready to close” signal S20 6 52LC
5
4
S2 a 52a
3
2
S2 b 52b
1
X5
F4 only “quick OPEN” 14 EMERGENCY OPEN
62
13 or short terminals
2nd auxiliary release: F3 "UVR", F4 "UVR td" 12 LT / (+)
27 Control power
11 N / (-)
10
S3 a 52a
9
8
S3 b 52b
7
6
S4 a 52a
5
0053-07_nu
4
S4 b 52b
3
2 LT / (+)
52M Control power
Optional motor disconnect switch 1 N / (-)
8–1
8.2 Auxiliary switches
S1, S2 S3, S4
Optional auxiliary switches Optional additional auxiliary switches
X6.10
X6.12
X5.10
X6.2
X6.4
X5.8
X5.4
X5.6
Terminals
S1 S2 S3 S4
X6-10
X6-12
X5-10
Wire no.
X6-2
X6-4
X5-8
X5-4
X5-6
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Internal
b a b a b a b a
S1 S2 S3 S4
2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
X6-11
Wire no. X6-9
X6-1
X6-3
X5-7
X5-9
X5-3
X5-5
0136-01_u
X6.11
Terminals
X6.9
X6.1
X6.3
X5.7
X5.9
X5.3
X5.5
8–2
8.3 Signaling switches
Open Fuse
Indication
S24 S22 S20 S23 *)
X9.14
X9.12
X9.10
Terminals
X6.6
X9.6
X9.8
Wire no.
X6-6
X9-6
NO
NO
NO
NO
NC
bl / blue
“Reset”
bl / blue
bn or gr
bn or gr
bl / blue
color
“Trip”
4 4 4 Reset
Internal
TC TC/UVR
S20 S22 S23 S24 S26

F1
1 1 1
sw / blk
sw / blk
color
sw / blk
sw / blk
Wire no.
COM
COM
X6-5
X9-5
COM
COM
0136-02_u
X9.13
Terminals X9.11
X6.5
X9.5
X9.7
*) Same installation location as S43

1) Contact closed means that the undervoltage release is energized or shunt trip is not energized - circuit breaker is possibly "Ready-to-close".
Contact open means that the undervoltage release is not energized or shunt trip is energized - circuit breaker is not "Ready-to-close".
8–3
8.4 Shunt Trip, Undervoltage Trip / Electrical closing lockout
L
F1 F2, F3, F4 **)
UVR
TC TC
UVRD
a a
1)
*) EMERGENCY OPEN or short terminals

**) Same installation location
1) For circuit breaker equipped with shunt trip and closing coil, the combined cutoff- switch S14 / S15 will be used. (One switch NO + NC is serving both coils.)
8–4
8.5 Closing Coil / Electrical CLOSE
CC
2)
CC S10 *)
CC
b
1)

1) For circuit breaker equipped with shunt trip and closing coil, the combined cutoff- switch S14 / S15 will be used. (One switch NO + NC is serving both coils.)
2) Use twin wire end ferrule
Crimping tool e.g.: Weidmüller PZ3 to PZ6, WAGO Variocrimp 4
8–5
8.6 Motor-operated mechanism
S12 *) M
24 - 30 V DC
48 - 60 V DC
X5.2
_u
L+
L- X5.1
8.7 Remote Bell Alarm Reset
F7 S13
BA
_u
8–6
8.8 Trip unit circuitry for ETU745-776
8.8.1 With Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) 

and metering module
External Iron Core External Air Core

Sensor Input Sensor Input
*)
_u
1)
Jumper X8.9-X8.10 if there is no external N sensor
2)
Terminating resistor 120 , 0.5 W on X8-1 / X8-2, if no external c- module is connected
3)
If no metering module and no BSS module is used: Direct connection X8 to ETU
4)
Connection to external voltage transformers
- BSS module: Breaker Status Sensor

- c: Bus system for interconnection of circuit breaker components and COM modules
- ETU: Electronic Trip Unit
- S40 signaling switch "Ready-to-close"
- S41 signaling switch for spring charge level
- S43 signaling switch 2nd shunt trip F3 or F4
- S44 signaling switch for main contacts OPEN / CLOSE position
- S45 Bell Alarm signaling switch
S43 *)
S45
S40 *) same installation location as S23

F5
S44
S41
ETU
8–7
8.8.2 Metering module only

_u
1)
Jumper X8.9-X8.10 if there is no external N sensor
2)
Terminating resistor 120 , 0.5 W on X8-1 / X8-2, if no external c- module is connected
3)
If no metering module and no BSS module is used: Direct connection X8 to ETU
4)
Connection to external voltage transformers
8–8
8.8.3 Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) only
L

_u
1) Jumper X8.9-X8.10 if there is no external N sensor

2) Terminating resistor 120 , 0.5 W on X8-1 / X8-2, if no external c- module is connected
8–9
9 Electronic components
9.1 Trip units
9.1.1 Overview of function
Trip Units
Functions ETU745 ETU776
 (9-2)  (9-7)
Basic protective functions  (page 9-11)
Overload protection (L-tripping) q q
Short-time-delayed short-circuit protection (S-tripping) q q
Instantaneous short-circuit protection (I-tripping) q q
Neutral conductor protection (N-tripping) q q
ground-fault tripping o o
Additional functions  (page 9-13)
Load monitoring q q
Pre-trip signal for long-time trip q q
Thermal memory can be switched on/off q q
Zone selective interlocking o o
Neutral conductor protection can be switched on/off q q
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection can be switched on/off q q
Instantaneous short-circuit protection can be switched on/off q q
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection switchable to I2t q q
Overload protection switchable to I4t q q
Changeable parameter sets - q
Ground-fault protection to I2t o o
Ground-fault alarm o o
Display  (page 9-17)
Alphanumeric display o -
Graphical display (fixed-mounted) - q
Communication
Communication via c q q
Communication via PROFIBUS DP o o
Communication via Modbus RTU o o
Communication via Modbus TCP o o
Communication via PROFINET IO o o
Metering function  (page 9-77)
Metering function PLUS o o
Parameterization
Parameterization via rotary coding switches q -
Parameterization via communication (absolute values) - q
Parameterization via menu (absolute values) - q
Remote parameterization of basic protective functions - q
Remote parameterization of additional functions q q
Other
Option for connecting to an external 24 V DC power supply q q
q standard
o optional
- not available
1 fixed
9–1
9.1.2 Trip unit ETU745
Overview
Mechanical RESET
for Bell Alarm Option: Reset Lockout
and remote trip prevents accidental resetting of the lock-out
mechanism after a trip
Scroll up
Option: Alphanumeric display

Trip unit
activated Scroll down
Trip unit error indicator

Indications Overcurrent alarm
Thermal memory On/Off

COMMUNICATIONS
Neutral conductor protection On/Off

EXTENDED
Neutral conductor overload setting

Rating Plug
Overload trip curve mode I2t / I4t

Rotary coding switch long-time
delay pickup setting
Rotary coding switch long-time delay setting
Rotary coding switch short-time Rotary coding switch short-time delay setting
delay pickup setting
Trip cause indicator 1)
Sealing eyelet
Rotary coding switch
instantaneous pickup setting
Option: Ground-fault module
Changeover switch ground-fault detection mode 2)

Ground-fault alarm
Rotary coding switch ground-fault Indications
pickup setting Ground-fault tripped
Rotary coding switch ground-fault Rotary coding switch ground-fault time

alarm setting delay setting tg / I2tg
Clear button
Test button
Test connector
Query button
1) The trip cause is stored internally for at least two days if the trip unit has been activated for at least 10 min before tripping
(for unlimited time with auxiliary power).
2) Changeover switch only accessible with removed module.
NOTICE
Electrostatic Discharge
Trip unit may become inoperative.
Before the protective cover is removed, ensure that the equipment to be connected, and also the operating 
personnel, are at the same potential.
9–2
Overcurrent protection settings
NOTICE
Circuit breaker may trip.
If the trip settings are changed while the breaker is closed (and under load) the breaker may trip.
Adjust parameters only when the circuit breaker is in the open position.
The parameters for the basic functions are adjusted with rotary coding switches.
The value 0.1 is set if the

rotary switch is positioned in this zone
3 x 0.5
1/8“
Various additional functions are adjusted with slide switches.
The settings for the additional function "load monitoring" can be adjusted via:
- the alphanumeric display  (page 9-17)
- TD400 and the software "powerconfig"
- the COM modules with a PC with the software “powerconfig” installed  (page 28-2)
These settings can only be adjusted if the trip unit is activated, i.e. it must be connected to an external 24 V DC voltage supply
(UL Listed Class 2).
Protective functions
 Overload protection – L-tripping (page 9-11)
 Short-time delayed short-circuit tripping – S-tripping (page 9-11)
 Instantaneous short-circuit tripping – I-tripping (page 9-12)
 Ground-fault tripping – G-tripping (page 9-12)
 Neutral conductor protection – N-tripping (page 9-13)
 Load monitoring (load restore / load shedding) (page 9-13)
 Leading signal for L-tripping (page 9-13)
 Thermal memory can be switched On/Off (page 9-14)
 Ground-fault protection modules (page 9-44)
9–3
Characteristics
The ranges shown in the following are only setting ranges of the respective parameters. Possible tolerance ranges are not included here.
Tolerance ranges are shown in the Easy TCC Time Current Curve Software.
The characteristics apply to the circuit breaker version H-class, 480 V, frame size II, with ground-fault protection module.
L-tripping
S-tripping
9–4
I-tripping
Ground-fault tripping
9–5
NOTICE
The parameters for the basic functions are adjusted with rotary coding switches.

rotary switch is positioned in this zone
3 x 0.5
1/8“
Various additional functions are adjusted with slide switches.
The settings for the additional function "load monitoring" can be adjusted via:
- the alphanumeric display  (page 9-17)
These settings can only be adjusted if the trip unit is activated, i.e. it must be connected to an external 24 V DC voltage supply 
(UL Listed Class 2).
Characteristics
Tolerance ranges are shown in the Easy TCC Time Current Curve Software. The characteristics apply to the circuit breaker version H-class,
480 V, frame size II, with ground-fault protection module.
L-tripping
 (page 9-4)
S-tripping
 (page 9-4)
 (page 9-5)
9–6
9.1.3 Trip unit ETU776
Overview
Mechanical RESET
for Bell Alarm and Option: Reset Lockout
remote trip prevents accidental resetting of the lockout
mechanism after a trip
Graphical display
Trip unit activated
Indicators Overcurrent alarm

Trip unit error indicator
COMMUNICATIONS
Operating keys for setting
tripping parameters
Trip cause indicator 1)
Sealing eyelet
Rating Plug
Ground-fault alarm
Option: Ground-fault module
Indicators
Ground-fault tripped
Areas to record
protective settings
Areas to record
protective settings
Test button
CLEAR button
Query button
Test connector
1) The trip cause is stored internally for at least two days if the trip unit has been activated for at least 10 min before tripping
(for unlimited time with auxiliary power).
NOTICE
Electrostatic Discharge
Trip unit may become inoperative.
Before the protective cover is removed, ensure that the equipment to be connected, and also the operating 
personnel, are at the same potential.
9–7
NOTICE
All parameters for the basic and the additional functions can be adjusted via:
- the graphical display  (page 9-28)
To do this, the trip unit must be activated, i.e. it must be connected to an external 24 V DC voltage supply (UL Listed Class 2).
Characteristics
Tolerance ranges are shown in the Easy TCC Time Current Curve Software.
The characteristics apply to the circuit breaker version H-class, 480 V, frame size II, with ground-fault protection module.
L-tripping
 (page 9-4)
I-tripping
 (page 9-5)
 (page 9-5)
9–8
9.1.4 Indicators
Scope of indications depends on the type of trip unit.
Trip unit is activated
I > Imin
- or when 24 V auxiliary power is applied.
Imin:
- 80 A for frame size II
- 150 A for frame size III
Flashing LED
Overcurrent alarm
- Steady LED, if
I IR
Communication active
- Another CublicleBUS module has been

recognized and communication started.
Extended protective function has tripped
- due to metering function

- trip cause saved in event memory
- trip cause readable via:
* TD400 and the software "powerconfig"
* the COM modules with a PC with the
software “powerconfig” installed
 (page 28-2)
* graphical display (ETU776)
* external digital output modules
9–9
Protective function has tripped
(overcurrent)
- Indicator lights up when the Query

button is pressed
- Only one trip cause is displayed
- Only the last trip cause is 
displayed
or
LED T.U. ERROR
1. T.U. Error flashes:

Limited protective function, the protective
parameters are reset to minimum values.
Causes:
- Rated current of the Rating Plug is higher
than that of the circuit breaker
- Rotary coding switch in undefined
intermediate position
- Trip unit defective
2. T.U. Error lights up continuously:
Protective function not available.
Causes:
- Rating Plug not compatible with 
circuit breaker type
- Trip unit defective
9 – 10
9.1.5 Protective functions
9.1.5.1 Basic protective functions
The basic protective functions of the trip unit are ensured without additional auxiliary voltage. The required energy is supplied by the 
circuit breaker's internal energy transformers.
To evaluate the currents, the electronic system of the trip unit calculates the r.m.s value.
The individual functions are parameterized according to the types via:
- rotary coding switch (ETU745)
- electronic data transfer (ETU776) via:
- the control board (ETU776)
Overload protection – L-tripping

The current setting IR defines the maximum continuous current the circuit breaker can carry without tripping. The long-time delay tR
determines the maximum duration of an overload without tripping.
Setting values for IR
ETU745 IR = (0.4 / 0.45 / 0.5 / 0.55 / 0.6 / 0.65 / 0.7 / 0.8 / 0.9 / 1.0) x In
ETU776 IR = (0.4 - 1.0) x In (given in Amps)
Setting values for tR
ETU745 tR = 2 / 3.5 / 5.5 / 8 / 10 / 14 / 17 / 21 / 25 / 30 sec. (at 6 x IR)

ETU776 tR = 2 - 30 sec. (at 6 x IR)
The tripping characteristic is an I2t characteristic. Some trip units can be switched over to an I4t characteristic.
 (page 9-14)
Short-time delayed short-circuit tripping – S-tripping

On trip units ETU745 - 776, tripping due to the short-circuit current Isd can be delayed by the time tsd.
This provides selectivity for short-circuit protection in switchgear with several grading levels.
Setting values for Isd
ETU745 Isd = (1.25 / 1.5 / 2 / 2.5 / 3 / 4 / 6 / 8 / 10 / 12) x In
Isd = 1.25 x In - 0.8 x ICW

ETU776
(given in Amps)
Setting values for tsd
ETU745 tsd = 0.02(M)1) / 0.1 / 0.2 / 0.3 / 0.4 sec.; OFF
ETU776 tsd = 0.02(M)1) / 0.08 - 4 sec.2); OFF

1)
The delay time 0.02 sec. is not an I2t function. 
The motor protection function is activated in this position.
2) For settings t >0.4 sec., the maximum possible setting I is reduced automatically according to the frame size:
sd sd
Frame size II : 20 kA
Frame size III : 30 kA
The setting "OFF" for trip units ETU745 and ETU776 is provided to deactivate the short-time delayed short-circuit protection.
If the zone selective interlocking (ZSI)  (page 9-14) is used and the ZSI module is set to "S" or "S+G" the adjusted delay time tsd is auto-
matically set to 50 ms provided that in the event of short-circuit the circuit breaker does not receive a blocking signal from a downstream
circuit breaker. In this case regardless of the adjusted tsd value the circuit breaker will trip after 50 ms.
If a blocking signal exists the adjusted delay time tsd is valid. For safety reasons after 3 s the blocking signal is terminated.
Some trip units can be switched over to an I2t-characteristic.  (page 9-15)
9 – 11
Motor protection function
When the short-time delay is set to 20ms (tsd = M 0.02 sec.), a special motor protective function is enabled which prevents short-time 
tripping during the turn-on inrush for motors. At the same time, a phase loss sensing function is enabled  (page 9-13) and the thermal time
constant used for long-time protection is changed from one suitable for bus protection to one suitable for motor protection.
Instantaneous short-circuit tripping – I-tripping

If the current setting Ii is exceeded, the circuit breaker is tripped instantaneously.
Setting values for Ii
ETU745 OFF: Ii = ICW

Ii = (1.5 / 2.2 / 3 / 4 / 6 / 8 / 10 / 12 × In
MAX = 0.8 x ICW
ETU776 Ii = 1.5 x In - 0.8 x Ics ; OFF : Ii = ICW
Ground-fault tripping – G-tripping

If the trip unit is equipped with a ground-fault protection module, loads can be protected against impermissibly high ground-fault currents.
Trip units ETU745 - 776 can be equipped with it optionally.  Ground-fault protection modules (page 9-44)
The response value Ig, together with the setting for the delay time tg, determines the shutdown of ground-fault currents.
Setting values for Ig
Frame size
II III
A 100 A 400 A
B 300 A 600 A
C 600 A 800 A
D 900 A 1000 A
E 1200 A 1200 A
Setting values for tg
ETU745 tg = 0.1 / 0.2 / 0.3 / 0.4 / 0.5 sec.
ETU776 tg = 0.1 - 2.0 sec.
If the zone selective interlocking (ZSI)  (page 9-14) is used and the ZSI module is set to "S" or "S+G" the adjusted delay time tg is auto-
matically set to 100 ms provided that in the event of ground-fault the circuit breaker does not receive a blocking signal from a downstream
circuit breaker. In this case regardless of the adjusted tg value the circuit breaker will trip after 100 ms.
If a blocking signal exists the adjusted delay time tg is valid. For safety reasons after 3 s the blocking signal is terminated. Some trip units
can be switched over to an I2t-characteristic.
9 – 12
Neutral conductor protection – N-tripping
Trip units ETU745 - 776 also make it possible to protect the neutral conductor against overload. This requires a current transformer for the
neutral conductor, which can be retrofitted if necessary.  (page 9-97)
For tripping, the same long-time delay tR applies as for overload tripping.
Setting values for IN
ETU745 IN = (0.5 / 1.0) × In; OFF

ETU776 IN = (0.2 - 2.0) × In; OFF
NOTICE
Neutral Conductor Overheating.
Neutral conductor or insulation may be damaged.
Settings IN > 1 x In should only be used if the neutral conductor has been properly sized.
9.1.5.2 Additional functions
Load monitoring (load restore / load shedding)

Trip units ETU745 - ETU776 offer the possibility of additional load monitoring. Two current values, "load shedding" and "load restore", as
well as a delay time tx, can be set.
If the setting value "load restore" is undershot, and the lower limit value for current transmission is exceeded at the same time, a signal is
output by the CublicleBUS after the set delay time tx has elapsed. If the setting value "load shedding" is exceeded, a signal is output by the
CublicleBUS after the set delay time tx has elapsed. These signals can be used to connect or disconnect loads, thereby preventing an over-
load tripping of incoming circuit breakers.
Setting values for load monitoring
"Load shedding" and "load restore" 40 A - 1.5 x In
Delay time tx = 1 - 15 sec.
Load monitoring can be adjusted via:

- the alphanumeric display (ETU745)
- the graphical display (ETU776)
Leading signal for L-tripping

Trip units ETU745 - 776 provide a leading signal for "L-tripping", which is transmitted via the CublicleBUS 100 milliseconds before overload
tripping. In this way it is possible e.g. to disconnect thyristor controllers.
Phase loss sensing

When phase loss sensing is active and the load current on the least-loaded phase is at least 50% below that of the highest loaded phase,
the long-time pickup value IR is automatically reduced to 80% of its set value. This is designed to prevent overheating conditions in motor
loads when a single phase of voltage is lost and the motor is operating on 2 phases. If the highest and lowest load phase currents return to
differing by less than 50%, IR returns to its set value.
In the trip unit ETU776, phase loss sensing can be activated independently from the motor protection tsd setting of 20ms.
9 – 13
Thermal memory can be switched On/Off
Trip units ETU745 - 776 make it possible to continue with the internally calculated reproduction of the thermal processes in downstream
switchgear and consumers even if the circuit breaker is open and the electronic system has no external supply. In this way, an effective
protection against thermal overload can also be guaranteed for frequent closing and opening processes.
The thermal memory can be activated via:
- a slide switch (ETU745)

- the COM modules with a PC with the software “powerconfig” installed  (page 28-2).
Zone selective interlocking

If the circuit breaker is combined with a ZSI module  (page 9-87), a short-circuit occurring in systems with several grading levels can be
precisely localized.
For this purpose, all circuit breakers are interconnected through their ZSI-modules.
When a short-circuit occurs, each circuit breaker affected by the short-circuit current queries its downstream circuit breaker to determine
whether the short-circuit is also present in the next downstream grading level. In the direction of the energy flow, only the circuit breaker
nearest to the short-circuit is tripped. A delay time which may have been set for the short-circuit tripping is deactivated. However, tripping
takes place after 50 milliseconds at the earliest.
Overload protection switchable to I4t

The trip units ETU776 and ETU745 can be set to perform long-time protection using either I2t or I4t. I4t will yield faster tripping times and will
improve coordination with many types of fuses. The ETU745 can be switched between the two modes via a slide switch and the ETU776 via
a menu setting.
In this case, the setting options for the long delay time tR change as follows:
Setting values for tR
ETU745 tR = 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 sec. (at 6 x IR)
ETU776 tR = 1- 5 sec. (at 6 x IR)
9 – 14
Short-time delayed short-circuit protection switchable to I2t
Trip units ETU745 - 776 make it possible to switch over from a constant delay time to an I2t-characteristic. In this way, the delay time
depends on the short-circuit current, but with a constant I2tsd-value, providing better coordination with downstream fuses.
In this case, the setting options for the short-time delay tR are as follows:
Settings for tsd
ETU745 tsd = 0.1 / 0.2 / 0.3 / 0.4 sec. (at 12 x In)

ETU776 tsd = 0.1 - 0.4 sec. (at 12 x In)
Switchover to the I2tsd characteristic can be made via:

- the tsd rotary coding switch (ETU745); this must be set to a value in the white area.
.

Changeable parameter sets

The trip unit ETU776 contains two complete sets of protective parameters and can be switched between them locally or remotely. 
This enables lowering instantaneous and short-time settings for arc flash mitigation as well as changing parameters when the source 
of supply changes between utility and generator.
Switching between parameter sets can be made manually via:
or remotely via:
- the CublicleBUS with an input signal at the digital input module.
- the PROFIBUS DP
- the PROFINET IO, Modbus TCP and Modbus RTU.
9 – 15
Ground-fault protection switchable to I2t characteristic
The ground-fault protection modules for trip units ETU745 - 776 make it possible to switch over from a constant delay time to an 
I2t characteristic.
This provides an inverse-time tripping characteristic with a constant I2tg value, providing better selectivity of the ground-fault protection in
systems with several grading levels.
The setting options for the delay time remain unchanged.
Switchover to the I2tg characteristic can be made via:
- the tg rotary coding switch (ETU745);
this must be set to a value in the white area.

Ground-fault alarm
9 – 16
9.1.6 ETU displays
9.1.6.1 Alphanumeric display
Trip units ETU745 can be fitted with an alphanumeric display.
Overview
(1) Screen (4 lines with 20 characters each)

(2) Up key
(3) Down key
9 – 17
Field installation
The trip units ETU745 can be field installed with an alphanumeric display.
DANGER
- OPEN circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring  (page 23-2)
- Disconnect external 24 V DC voltage supply, if applicable
- Remove sealing cap of trip unit, if applicable  (page 9-53)
Removing dummy flange
4 3
1
Installing display and latching it tight
1 3
- Fit and seal trip unit sealing cap, if applicable  (page 9-53)
- Reconnect external 24 V DC voltage supply, if applicable
9 – 18
Modifying the angle of the display
At the factory, the alphanumeric display is installed with a downward inclination. However, it can be turned in a vertical direction by 180°, the
display is then inclined upwards.
DANGER
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring  (page 23-2)
- Disconnect external 24 V DC voltage supply, if applicable
- Remove trip unit sealing cap, if applicable  (page 9-53)
Removing the display
4 3
9 – 19
Turn the display through 180°, insert and lock it into place
- Fit and seal the trip unit sealing cap, if applicable  (page 9-53)
- Reconnect external 24 V DC voltage supply, if applicable
Catalog number
Catalog No.
Alphanumeric display for ETU745 WLLCD48
9 – 20
Menu structure ETU745
After the supply voltage has been applied, the display changes from "Power-up screen" to "Autoscroll" mode after about 5 sec. Thereafter,
further modes can be accessed by means of the two buttons.
Overview
Start
Power-up-screen
5s
Mode
"Fixed screen display" Mode "Autoscroll" Mode "Parameter setting"
10 s
+ +
Mode "Contrast setting"

0483_u
"Autoscroll" mode
During normal operation, the display is in "Autoscroll" mode
To access "Autoscroll" mode, press the following button(s)
In "Fixed screen display" mode
In "Tripping counter reset" mode

or
In "Contrast setting" mode

+
In "Parameter setting" mode Do not press any button for 10 seconds
In "Tripping info" mode
In this mode, the display automatically changes to the next screen every 5 seconds.
If there is no metering module installed, the display changes continuously back and forth between screens 1 and 2.
If there is a metering module installed, a total of five screens are displayed in "Autoscroll" mode.
9 – 21
Screens displayed in "Autoscroll" mode
without metering module

Screen 1 

I1....=......00000.A Current I1
I2....=......00000.A Current I2
I3....=......00000.A Current I3
IN....=......00000.A Current IN
Screen 2 

Ig....=......00000.A Ground-fault current Ig 
(A value is only displayed if a
ground-fault protection mod-
ule is fitted.)
with metering module installed, additionally
Screen 3 

KW...=.±..00000.kW Active power P 
KVA..=....00000.kVA Apparent power S 
KVAR.=.±..00000.kVAR Reactive power Q 
PF...=.±..0,000.xxxx Power factor
Screen 4 

V12.=.........0000.V Voltage V12
V23.=.........0000.V Voltage V23
V31.=.........0000.V Voltage V31
Screen 5 

W. .=...00000,00.MWh Energy (positive direction) 
W. .=...00000,00.MWh Energy (negative direction) 
PowerFlowDir....... Present direction of energy
f...=........00,0 Hz flow 
Frequency
NOTE
The data to be displayed are updated every time the screen page is set up again. No updates take place when a screen page is
being displayed.
Button functions in "Autoscroll" mode
Display is frozen;
Switchover to
"Fixed screen display" mode
Change to
"Parameter setting" mode
Change to
+ "Contrast setting" mode
Mode "Fixed screen display"
9 – 22
To access "Fixed screen display" mode, press the following
button:
In "Autoscroll" mode
In this mode, maintenance information is provided with the number of circuit breaker trips and electrical open/close operations as well as
with maintenance instructions. The information displayed depends on the number of circuit breaker trips operations.

Num.of.Trips...00000 Number of trips
Num.of.Ops.....00000 Number of open/close 
operations

Num.of.Trips...00000 Number of trips
Num.of.Ops.....00000 Number of open/close 
Prepare for contact operations
maintenance Maintenance instructions
Button functions in "Fixed screen display" mode
Change to next higher screen 

level
Change to "Autoscroll" mode
Change to "Tripping counter reset"

+ mode
"Tripping counter reset" submode

This mode makes it possible to reset the counter for the trips and the open/close operations to zero.
NOTE
The counter should only be reset after contact maintenance.
If the counter is reset without contact maintenance having been performed, the maintenance information displayed will not corre-
spond to the actual condition of the contacts.
To access "Tripping counter reset mode", press the following

button(s)
In the "Fixed screen display" mode

+
Screens displayed in "Tripping counter reset" mode
Screen 1 

Reset.Trips.and.Ops This screen is used for safety
Counter? queries.
yes:. + Reset the counter after contact
maintenance only.
no:. .or.
9 – 23
Screens displayed in "Tripping counter reset" mode
Screen 2 

Trips.and.Ops Counter reset for trips and
Counter.reset open/close operations 
continue:. .or. confirmed.
Button functions in "Tripping counter reset" mode

If screen 1 is displayed
Canceling, no counter reset to

or zero
Change to "Autoscroll" mode
Counter reset to zero

+ Change to screen 2
If screen 2 is displayed
or Change to "Autoscroll" mode
9 – 24
"Parameter setting" mode
NOTICE
In this mode, the following parameters can be adjusted:

- load shedding
- load restore
- delay time for load shedding/load restore
- language setting for display
To access "Parameter setting" mode, press the following button(s):
Screens displayed in "Parameter setting" mode

Screen 1 

Change Parameters Setting
Load.Shed..=.0000.A Load shedding
=+ =-
.und. =Confirm
Screen 2 

Load.Restore=.0000.A Load restore
=+ =-
.und. =Confirm
Screen 3 

tx..........=...00.s Delay time 
=+ =- Load shedding/load restore
.und. =Confirm
Screen 4 

Change Parameters Setting 
Sprache/Lang=...XXXX Display language
=+ =- XXXX may be ENGL or GERM
.und. =Confirm
Screen 5 

Changed.Parameter Parameter settings are being
being.saved, changed, switches to "Auto-
wait.10s scroll" mode after 10 seconds
NOTE
When screen 1, 2, 3 or 4 is displayed and no key is pressed within 10 seconds, "Parameter setting" mode is canceled.
Any parameter changes performed are not accepted. Display switches back to "Autoscroll" mode
9 – 25
"Contrast setting" mode
In this mode, the contrast of the display can be adjusted.
To access "Contrast setting" mode, press the following 

button(s):
+
Screens displayed in "Contrast setting" mode
Screen 1 

Contrast Adjust Contrast setting
The longer the bar, the higher
0 50 100 % the contrast
+ - Enter
Button functions in "Contrast setting" mode
Increases the contrast
Reduces the contrast
Accept the contrast,

+ switch to the "Autoscroll" mode
"Tripping info" screen

This mode will automatically be activated as soon as a trip occurs, provided an external 24 V DC voltage supply has been connected.
Screens displayed in "Tripping info" mode
Tripping type
Phase affected
XX may be:
L, S, I, G, N, M1)
YY may be:
L1, L2, L3,
1)
Metering function
Button functions in "Tripping info" mode
Display of maintenance
or instructions
If pressed again:
Switches back to "Tripping info"
mode
Press CLEAR button

Switches to "Autoscroll" mode
9 – 26
"Display parameter changes" screen
The display automatically switches to this mode when a parameter has been changed via the rotary coding switches, provided an external
24 V DC voltage supply has been connected.
Screens displayed in "Display parameter changes" mode

Parameter changed: 

XXXXXX.=...000000.YY Display of the changed value
Displayed technical data and units
Changed data Unit
IR.....=....00000.YY A
ISD....=....00000.YY A
Ii.....=....00000.YY A
IN.....=....00000.YY A
Ig.....=.....0000.YY A
Ig.alarm.=...0000.YY A
tg.....=......000.YY ms
I^2tg..=......000.YY ms
I^2tR..=......000.YY s
I^4tR..=........0.YY s
tSD....=......000.YY ms
I^2tSD.=......000.YY ms
th.mem.=.........YYY ..
IR Current for overload tripping

ISD Current for short-time delayed short-circuit tripping
 
Ii Current for instantaneous short-circuit tripping
IN Current for overload protection of the N conductor
Ig Current for ground-fault protection tripping 
 (this is only displayed if ground-fault protection module is available)

Ig.alarm Response current for ground-fault protection alarm indicator
 (this is only displayed if a ground-fault protection module is installed)

tg Delay time for ground-fault protection (this is only displayed if a ground-fault protection module is installed)
 
I^2tg Inverse-time delay (I2t-dependent) of ground-fault protection (this is only displayed if a ground-fault protection module is installed)
 
I^2tR Inverse-time delay (I2t-dependent) for overload tripping
I^4tR Inverse-time delay (I4t-dependent) for overload tripping
tSD Delay time for short-circuit tripping
I^2tSD Inverse-time delay (I2t-dependent) for short-circuit tripping
 
th.mem Indicates whether thermal memory is On/Off
Button functions in "Display parameter changes" mode
The changed value is displayed for 4 seconds. The display then switches back to the previous mode.
9 – 27
9.1.6.2 Graphical display
The ETU776 trip unit equipped with a fixed-mounted graphical display as standard. This display enables a text output with a maximum of
8 lines or the graphical representation of characteristics.
It is used both to display data as well as to parameterize the trip unit and the metering function. The display is operated via the operating
keys provided on the trip unit.
(1)
(2)
(1) Graphical display

(2) Operating keys
Display overview
(1) Menu title

(2) 8-line alphanumeric display or graphical representation of characteristics
(3) Status line
Status line
The status line shows, by means of bold symbols, which actions the operator can carry out and which settings are currently active at this
moment.
PAR TRIG
A AB ESC
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(1) Access with password only

(2) Maintenance required
(3) Set parameter set for protective functions
(4) Editing option
(5) Set trigger
(6) Possible actions by the operator
9 – 28
Representation of bar diagrams
The measured values for some parameters are displayed both as numerical values and graphically in the form of a bar diagram.
(1) Lowest measured value

(2) Present measured value
(3) Current measured valuee
(4) 100% of the measured parameter
(5) Width of display
The markings for the lowest and highest measured value are automatically updated during the measurement.
Display during operation

After the supply voltage is applied, the display switches from the "power up screen" to the operational screen after approximately 5 seconds.
It shows the currents in the three phases and in the neutral conductor as numerical values and in the form of a bar diagram. The background
illumination of the display is automatically switched off after approximately 1 minute. It can be switched on again by pressing any button.
Polling the main menu

(any key)
(enter)
(esc)
(esc) or screen saver times out

screen saver
times out
9 – 29
Navigating in the menu structure
Use the operating keys to navigate in the menu structure.
Button functions
Shift the marking
Select the marked menu item
Switch back to the previous menu
Selection of a menu item
9 – 30
Displaying measured values
Example 1: Displaying the currents
MA I N ME N U ME T E R I N G CURRENT I L 1
Me t e r i n g I a v g = 7 5 2 A I L 1 = 7 6 5 A I L 1 m i n = 7 0 6 A
(enter)
(enter)
(enter)
Di a g n o s t i c Ua v g = 4 0 1 V 2 8- J AN- 0 3
Vi e w P a r a me t e r P = + 2 7 7 kW I L 2 = 7 5 8 A 1 6: 2 9: 3 2. 0 1
Ch a n g e P a r a me t e r S = 3 0 2 k VA
I d e n t i f i c a t i o n Q = + 1 2 0k VAR I L 3 = 7 5 0 A I L 1 m a x = 7 8 8 A
Cl e a r p f a v g = 0. 9 1 8 l a g 0 4- J AN- 0 3
Di s p l a y Se t u p W = + 2 1 2 0 7 M Wh r I N = 0 A 0 8: 5 9: 3 8. 2 1
(esc)
(esc)
(esc)
f r e q = 5 0. 0 2 Hz
PAR TRIG PAR TRIG PAR TRIG PAR TRIG
A AB A AB A AB A AB
(down 8x) (up 8x) (down 7x) (up 7x)
ME T E R I N G CURRENT
Ua v g = 4 0 1 V I g = 5 A
P = + 2 7 7 kW
S = 3 0 2 k VA I a v g = 7 5 2 A
Q = + 1 2 0k VAR
p f a v g = 0. 9 1 8 l a g I a v g l t = 7 5 2 A
W = + 2 1 2 0 7 M Wh r
f r e q = 5 0. 0 2 Hz Un b a l . = 1 0 %
T e mp = 2 2 5. 0 F
PAR TRIG PAR TRIG
A AB A AB
Example 2: Displaying the frequency
MA I N ME N U ME T E R I N G F RE QUE NCY F REQ
Me t e r i n g I a v g = 7 5 2 A F r e q = 5 0. 0 2 Hz f m i n = 5 0. 0 2 Hz
(enter)
(enter)
(enter)
Di a g n o s t i c Ua v g = 4 0 1 V 2 8- J AN- 0 3
Vi e w P a r a me t e r P = + 2 7 7 kW I T H D = 1 0 % 1 6: 2 9: 3 2. 0 1
I d e n t i f i c a t i o n Q = + 1 2 0k VAR UT H D = 1 0 % f m a x = 5 0. 0 2 Hz
Di s p l a y Se t u p W = + 2 1 2 0 7 M Wh r F o r m F = 4. 0 0 8: 5 9: 3 8. 2 1
(esc)
(esc)
(esc)
f r e q = 5 0. 0 2 Hz Cr e s t F = 4. 0
A AB A AB A AB A AB
(down 8x) (up 8x) (down5x) (up 5x)
ME T E R I N G F RE QUE NCY
Ua v g = 4 0 1 V H a r mo n i c s
P = + 2 7 7 kW
S = 3 0 2 k VA
Q = + 1 2 0k VAR
p f a v g = 0. 9 1 8 l a g
W = + 2 1 2 0 7 M Wh r
f r e q = 5 0. 0 2 Hz
T e mp = 2 2 5. 0 F
PAR TRIG PAR TRIG
A AB A AB
9 – 31
Example 3: Displaying harmonics
MA I N ME N U ME T E R I N G F RE QUE NCY
Me t e r i n g I a v g = 7 5 2 A f r e q = 5 0. 0 2 Hz
(enter)
(enter)
Di a g n o s t i c Ua v g = 4 0 1 V
Vi e w P a r a me t e r P = + 2 7 7 kW I T H D = 1 0 %
I d e n t i f i c a t i o n Q = + 1 2 0k VAR UT H D = 1 0 %
Cl e a r p f a v g = 0. 9 1 8 l a g
Di s p l a y Se t u p W = + 2 1 2 0 7 M Wh r F o r m F = 4. 0
(esc)
(esc)
f r e q = 5 0. 0 2 Hz Cr e s t F = 4. 0
PAR TRIG PAR TRIG PAR TRIG
A AB A AB A AB
(down 8x) (up 8x) (down5x) (up 5x)
ME T E R I N G F RE QUE NCY H A R MON I C S
Ua v g = 4 0 1 V H a r mo n i c s I a v g Ua v g
P = + 2 7 7 kW T HD 1 0. 0% 1 0. 0%
S = 3 0 2 k VA 2 0. 0% 0. 0%
Q = + 1 2 0k VAR 3 0. 0% 0. 0%
p f a v g = 0. 9 1 8 l a g 4 0. 0% 0. 0%
W = + 2 1 2 0 7 M Wh r 5 9. 0% 9. 0%
f r e q = 5 0. 0 2 Hz 6 0. 0% 0. 0%
(esc)
T e mp = 2 2 5. 0 F 7 3. 0% 3. 0%
A AB A AB A AB
(down 28x) (up 28x)
H A R MON I C S
2 2 0. 0% 0. 0%
2 3 0. 0% 0. 0%
2 4 0. 0% 0. 0%
2 5 0. 0% 0. 0%
2 6 0. 0% 0. 0%
2 7 0. 0% 0. 0%
2 8 0. 0% 0. 0%
2 9 0. 0% 0. 0%
PAR TRIG
A AB
Displaying parameters
Example 4: Displaying parameters parameter settings
MA I N ME N U VI EW P A R A ME T E R P ROT . PAR. SET B L T r i p
Me t e r i n g Sy s t e m Co n f i g . T r i p = 1 0 0 0 A St a t u s = On
(enter)
(enter)
(enter)
Di a g n o s t i c Pr o t . Pa r . Se t A S T r i p = 8 5 0 0 s Pi c k u p = 1 0 0 0 A
Vi e w P a r a me t e r Pr o t . Pa r . Se t B I T r i p = 1 4 4 0 0 A De l a y = 4. 8 s
4
Ch a n g e P a r a me t e r Me t e r i n g N T r i p = 1 2 0 A I * t = I t
I d e n t i f i c a t i o n Se t p o i n t s G Pr o t e c = 5 0 0 A
Cl e a r C o mmu n i c a t i o n T h e r mM e m= Of f
Di s p l a y Se t u p Ph a s e Se n = On
(esc)
(esc)
(esc)
T a u = 1 0 0
A AB A AB A AB A AB
9 – 32
Example 5: Displaying active power
MA I N ME N U ME T E R I N G P O WE R P a v g
Me t e r i n g I a v g = 7 5 2 A P L 1 = + 2 7 8 kW P a v g m i n = + 2 5 2 kW
(enter)
(enter)
(enter)
Di a g n o s t i c Ua v g = 4 0 1 V P L 2 = + 2 7 7 kW 2 8- J AN- 0 1
Vi e w P a r a me t e r P = + 2 7 7 kW P L 3 = + 2 7 9 kW 1 6: 2 9: 3 2. 0 1
Ch a n g e P a r a me t e r S = 3 0 2 k VA P a v g = + 2 7 7 kW
I d e n t i f i c a t i o n Q = + 1 2 0k VAR P a v g m a x = + 3 0 2 kW
Di s p l a y Se t u p W = + 2 1 2 0 7 M Wh r 0 8: 5 9: 3 8. 2 1
(esc)
(esc)
(esc)
f r e q = 5 0. 0 2 Hz
A AB A AB A AB A AB
(down 8x) (up 8x)
ME T E R I N G
Ua v g = 4 0 1 V
P = + 2 7 7 kW
S = 3 0 2 k VA
Q = + 1 2 0k VAR
p f a v g = 0. 9 1 8 l a g
W = + 2 1 2 0 7 M Wh r
f r e q = 5 0. 0 2 Hz
T e mp = 2 2 5. 0 F
PAR TRIG
A AB
Calling up diagnostic information
Example 6: Querying maintenance information
MA I N ME N U DI AGNOS T I C MA I N T E N A N C E
Me t e r i n g Wa r n i n g s T o t a l Op s = 2 2 7
(enter)
(enter)
Di a g n o s t i c T r i p L o g Op s w/ l o a d = 1 2 5
Vi e w P a r a me t e r Se t p o i n t s SI T r i p s = 2
Ch a n g e P a r a me t e r Ma i n t e n a n c e L T r i p s = 1
I d e n t i f i c a t i o n Cu b i c l e BUS g T r i p s = 5
Cl e a r Wa v e f o r m Op Ho u r s = 1 3 2 5 4
Di s p l a y Se t u p I n t . F a u l t = 8
(esc)
(esc)
2
Su m I t L 1= 3
A AB A AB A AB
(down 11x) (up11x)
MA I N T E N A N C E CONT ACT E ROS I ON
g T r i p s = 5
(enter)
Op Ho u r s = 1 3 2 5 4 Af t e r T r i p
I n t . F a u l t = 8 c h e c k c o n t a c t s
2
Su m I t L 1= 3
2
Su m I t L 2= 3
2
Su m I t L 3= 3
2
Su m I t N= 0
(esc)
Co n t a c t Er o s i o n
PAR TRIG PAR TRIG
A AB A AB
9 – 33
Example 7: Adjusting representation of characteristics
MA I N ME N U DI AGNOS T I C WA V E F O R M
Me t e r i n g Wa r n i n g s Wa v e f o r m Se t u p
(enter)
(enter)
(enter)
Di a g n o s t i c T r i p L o g Di s p l a y Wa v e f o r m
Vi e w P a r a me t e r Se t p o i n t s
Ch a n g e P a r a me t e r Ma i n t e n a n c e
I d e n t i f i c a t i o n Cu b i c a l BUS
Cl e a r Wa v e f o r m
Di s p l a y Se t u p
(esc)
(esc)
(esc)
A AB A AB A AB
T R I GGER TR I P EVENT PROT . P AR AME T E R S
(enter)
T r i p Ev e n t Pr o t . P a r a me t e r s L T r i p
(enter)
(enter)
Se t p o i n t Ev e n t Cu r r e n t S T r i p
Ov e r l o a d Vo l t a g e I T r i p
No T r i g g e r Re a l P o we r G T r i p
F r e q u e n c y N T r i p
(esc)
(esc)
A AB A AB A AB
P OS I T I ON P OS I T I ON P OS I T I ON
(enter)
0s T 1s 0s T 1s 0s T 1s
(down 5X)
(enter)
Pr e T r i g Pr e T r i g Pr e T r i g
0. 8 0 s 0. 3 0 s 0. 3 0 s
(esc)
(esc)

A AB A AB A AB
9 – 34
WA V E F O R M SET UP SET T RI GGE R A
Se t T r i g g e r A T r i g g e r =
(enter)
(enter)
(enter)
Se t T r i g g e r B L T r i p
Po s i t i o n =
0s T 1s
(esc)
Re s e t / St a r t
(esc)
(esc)
PAR TRIG PAR TRIG

A AB A AB
SET T RI GGE R A
(enter)
T r i g g e r =
(enter)
L T r i p
Po s i t i o n =
0s T 1s
(esc)
Re s e t / St a r t
(esc)
PAR TRIG
A AB
SET T RI GGE R A RESET / ST ART

(enter)
T r i g g e r =
(enter)
3 sec.
L T r i p T r i g g e r A
No w Mo n i t o r i n g
Po s i t i o n =
0s T
1s
Re s e t / St a r t
(esc)
PAR TRIG PAR TRIG
A AB A AB
9 – 35
Example 8: Selecting event for displaying characteristics
(enter)
MA I N ME N U DI AGNOS T I C WA V E F O R M
Me t e r i n g Wa r n i n g s Wa v e f o r m Se t u p
(enter)
(enter)
Di a g n o s t i c T r i p L o g Di s p l a y Wa v e f o r m
I d e n t i f i c a t i o n Cu b i c a l BUS
(esc)
(esc)
(esc)
A AB A AB A AB
CURRENT S UP L OAD A EVENT S
Up l o a d A Ev e n t s
(enter)
Up l o a d B Ev e n t s Pl e a s e Wa i t . . . (goto "DISPLAY
GRAPH" in example 9)
Up l o a d I n
Pr o c e s s
(esc)
PAR TRIG PAR TRIG

A AB A AB
9 – 36
DI SPL AY WA V E F O R M EVENT UP L OAD
Ev e n t Up l o a d Cu r r e n t s
(enter)
(enter)
(enter)
Di s p l a y Gr a p h Cu r r e n t s + G & N
Vo l t a g e s
(esc)
(esc)
(esc)
PAR TRIG PAR TRIG

A AB A AB
(enter) 5 sec.
UP L OAD A EVENT S
T r i g g e r Ha s
No t Oc c u r r e d
PAR TRIG
A AB
9 – 37
Example 9: Displaying characteristics
MA I N ME N U DI AGNOS T I C
Me t e r i n g Wa r n i n g s
(enter)
(enter)
Di a g n o s t i c T r i p L o g
I d e n t i f i c a t i o n Cu b i c l e BUS
(esc)
(esc)
PAR TRIG PAR TRIG
A AB A AB
DI SPL AY WA V E F O R M DI SPL AY GRAP H
Ev e n t Up l o a d
(enter)
5 sec.
Di s p l a y Gr a p h
T r i g g e r A
Cu r r e n t s
Re c o r d e d
PAR TRIG PAR TRIG

A AB A AB
(enter) 5 sec.
DI SPL AY GRAP H
No Da t a
Av a i l a b l e
Pl e a s e Up l o a d
Ev e n t
PAR TRIG
A AB
9 – 38
WA V E F O R M
Wa v e f o r m Se t u p
(enter)
Di s p l a y Wa v e f o r m
(esc)
PAR TRIG
A AB
I L 1 WA V E F O R M I L 1 WA V E F O R M I L 1 WA V E F O R M
T T T
(enter 8X)
(down 2X)
L 2 L 2 L 2
X
L 3 L 3 L 3
L g XX L g X L g
LN LN LN
I L 1 = 0 A I L 1 = - 1 0 0, 0 0 0 A I L 1 = - 1 0 0, 0 0 0 A
t = T 0. 0 0 0 s t = T + 0. 0 0 8 s t = T + 0. 0 0 8 s
A AB A AB A AB
(enter)
I L 2 WA V E F O R M
L 1
(esc) goes to "DISPLAY WAVEFORM" menu L 3
X
L g
LN
I L 2 = - 8 0, 0 0 0 A
t = T + 0. 0 0 8 s
PAR TRIG
A AB
9 – 39
Changing parameters
Example 10: Setting protection parameters
MA I N ME N U CHANGE P A R A ME T E R P ROT . PAR. SET B
Me t e r i n g Sy s t e m Co n f i g . T r i p = 1 0 0 0 A
(enter)
(enter)
(enter)
Di a g n o s t i c Pr o t . Pa r . Se t A S T r i p = 8 5 0 0 s
Vi e w P a r a me t e r Pr o t . Pa r . Se t B I T r i p = 1 4 4 0 0 A
Ch a n g e P a r a me t e r Me t e r i n g N T r i p = 1 2 0 A
I d e n t i f i c a t i o n Se t p o i n t s G Pr o t e c = 5 0 0 A
Cl e a r C o mmu n i c a t i o n T h e r mM e m= Of f
Di s p l a y Se t u p Ph a s e Se n = On
T a u = 1 0 0
(esc)
(esc)
(esc)
A AB A AB A AB
P ROT . PAR. SET B P ROT . PAR. SET B
P a r a me t e r Ch a n g e P a r a me t e r Ch a n g e
No t Sa v e d ! ! Sa v e d
PAR TRIG PAR TRIG

A AB A AB
Settings the display
Example 11: Entering password
MA I N ME N U DI SPL AY SET UP P A S S WO R D
Me t e r i n g Sy s t e m T i me En t e r Ne w P s wr d
(enter)
(enter)
(enter)
Di a g n o s t i c L a n g u a g e
Vi e w P a r a me t e r P a s s wo r d * * * *
Ch a n g e P a r a me t e r Sc r e e n Sa v e r
I d e n t i f i c a t i o n Co n t r a s t
Cl e a r T e mp Un i t
(esc)
(esc)
PAR TRIG PAR TRIG PAR TRIG (esc)

A AB A AB A AB
P A S S WO R D P A S S WO R D
(enter) P a s s wo r d P a s s wo r d
Ch a n g e NOT Sa v e d Ch a n g e Sa v e d
(esc)
PAR TRIG PAR TRIG
A AB A AB
9 – 40
L T r i p L T r i p L T r i p
St a t u s = On St a t u s = On St a t u s = On
(enter)
(enter)
(enter)
(down)
Pi c k u p = 1 0 0 0 A Pi c k u p = 1 0 0 0 A Pi c k u p = 9 5 0 A
De l a y = 4. 8 s De l a y = 4. 8 s De l a y = 4. 8 s
4 4 4
I * t = I t I * t = I t I * t = I t
(esc)
(esc)
(esc)

A AB A AB A AB
P ROT . PAR. SET B
(enter) Sa v e P a r a me t e r
Ch a n g e s ?
= YES
ESC= No
(esc)
PAR TRIG
A AB
(all greyed except key & pencil)
P A S S WO R D P A S S WO R D
En t e r Ne w P s wr d En t e r Ne w P s wr d
(enter)
(enter)
(enter)
7* * * 7 2 6 5
(esc)
(esc)
(esc)
PAR TRIG PAR TRIG

A AB A AB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
P A S S WO R D
(enter) Sa v e Ch a n g e s ?
= YES
ESC= No
(esc)
PAR TRIG
A AB
9 – 41
Identifications
Example 12: Identifications
MA I N ME N U I DE NT I F I CAT I ON T RI P UNI T S/ N
Me t e r i n g T r i p Un i t Pa r t # 4 2 3 8 1 2 6 7 5 2 3 8
(enter)
(enter)
Di a g n o s t i c T r i p Un i t S/ N
Vi e w P a r a me t e r T e s t I n f o .
Ch a n g e P a r a me t e r Us e r Gi v e n I D#
I d e n t i f i c a t i o n Us e r C o mme n t
Cl e a r
(esc)
(esc)
A AB A AB A AB ESC
Resetting
Example 13: Resetting the measured minimum and maximum values
MA I N ME N U CL EAR
Me t e r i n g Cu r r e n t F a u l t
(enter)
Di a g n o s t i c Mi n / Ma x Bu f f e r (enter)
Vi e w P a r a me t e r T e mp Mi n / Ma x
Ch a n g e P a r a me t e r T r i p L o g
I d e n t i f i c a t i o n Ma i n t e n a n c e I n f o
Cl e a r
(esc)
PAR TRIG PAR TRIG

A AB A AB
MI N / MA X BUF F ER MI N / MA X BUF F ER MI N / MA X BUF F ER
(enter)
Mi n / Ma x Bu f f e r Mi n / Ma x Bu f f e r Ar e Yo u Su r e Yo u
NOT Re s e t ! ! Re s e t Wa n t T o Re s e t ?
= YES
ESC= No
(esc)

A AB A AB A AB
9 – 42
9.1.7 Rating Plug
The Rating Plug defines the rated current In within a certain range for a given circuit breaker frame size.
If a rating plug with a higher current than the maximum permissible circuit breaker rated continuous current is plugged in, the electronic
system of the trip unit recognizes this error and signals it with a flashing T.U. ERROR indicator.
The trip unit ignores the rated current value specified by the incorrect Rating Plug and sets it to the value of the smallest Rating Plug for the
frame size of the relevant circuit breaker.
The same happens if a circuit breaker with frame size III is equipped with a Rating Plug smaller than 800 A. 
All set protection parameters are adjusted accordingly.
It is not permitted to operate the trip unit without a Rating Plug. If a circuit breaker is nevertheless started up without a Rating Plug, 
the T.U. ERROR indicator will light up and the trip unit settings will default to the lowest possible settings for that frame rating.
Frame size Rating Plug Catalog No.

II III
q 200 A WLRP200
q 225 A WLRP225
q 250 A WLRP250
q 300 A WLRP300
q 315 A WLRP315
q 350 A WLRP350
q 400 A WLRP400
q 450 A WLRP450
q 500 A WLRP500
q 600 A WLRP600
q 630 A WLRP630
q 700 A WLRP700
q q 800 A WLRP800
q q 1000 A WLRP1000
q q 1200 A WLRP1200
q q 1250 A WLRP1250
q q 1600 A WLRP1600
q q 2000 A WLRP2000
q q 2500 A WLRP2500
q q 3000 A WLRP3000
q q 3200 A WLRP3200
q 4000 A WLRP4000
q 5000 A WLRP5000
9 – 43
Replacing Rating Plug
NOTICE
1
OPEN
3
9.1.8 Ground-fault protection modules
WL trip units can be optionally equipped with modules that add ground fault protection. The modules provide either an alarm-only function
or alarm-and-trip functionality.
The modules can be added or removed as necessary in the field.
Settings are found on  (page 9-12)
The following combinations are possible:
Trip unit Ground-fault protection module
GFM A 745 (alarm only)

ETU745
GFM AT 745 (alarm and trip)
GFM A 776 (alarm only)

ETU776
GFM AT 776 (alarm and trip)
The following options exist for ground-fault detection:

- Vector sum of the three phase currents plus neutral, if a neutral sensor is connected (residual sensing).
- Direct measurement of the ground-fault current using a separate 1200 A : 1 A iron-core ground fault sensor.
The direct-sense input to the trip unit has the following current-carrying capability:
- max. 1 A continuous
- max. 5 A for 0.5 sec.
Note
If the circuit breaker is applied in a 4-wire system, and residual ground
fault protection is desired, it is strongly recommended that a WL neutral
sensor (WLNCT2, WLNCT3) be used on the neutral to facilitate the 
correct vector-summation of the phase currents with the neutral. Failure
to apply a neutral sensor may result in erroneous GF alarm and trips.
Note
Output of alarms and messages is possible via COM and c
modules.
9 – 44
Module GFM A 745
Changeover switch for ground-fault

detection Ground-fault alarm indicator
Rotary switch for ground-fault

alarm setting value Rotary switch for ground-fault
delay setting tg / I2tg
- Alarm only, circuit breaker does not trip

- The changeover switch for ground-fault detection is only accessible when the control panel or the trip unit itself is removed.
Module GFM AT 745
Changeover switch for ground-fault

detection ground-fault alarm
Indicators
ground-fault tripped
protection setting value

delay setting tg / I2tg
alarm setting value
- Ground-fault protection by circuit breaker tripping and alarm signal

- Changeover switch for ground-fault protection accessible only when the control panel or the trip unit itself is removed
9 – 45
Module GFM A 776
Ground-fault detection mode

Ground-fault alarm indicator
Labeling areas for recording

setting values
setting values
- Alarm only, circuit breaker does not trip

- Module programmable via:
Module GFM AT 776
G ALARM
Ground-fault detection mode Indicators
G tripped

setting values
setting values
- Ground-fault protection by circuit breaker tripping and alarm signal

- Module programmable via:
- Ground-fault detection selectable:
- vector sum  I = L1+L2+L3+N
- external iron core ground-fault current sensor 1200 A : 1 A
9 – 46
Field installation
DANGER
WARNING
Removing dummy module
Installing and snapping the ground-fault protection module into place
- Switch on external 24 V DC voltage supply, if planned

- Adjust settings for ground-fault protection
- Test the tripping function with the handheld test device  (page 9-99)
- Install and seal sealing cap of trip unit, if applicable  (page 9-53)
9 – 47
Catalog numbers
Ground-fault protection module Catalog No.
GFM A 745 WLGFA48
GFM AT 745 WLGFM48
GFM A 776 WLGFA76
GFM AT 776 WLGFM76
9 – 48
9.1.9 Replace the trip unit
DANGER
WARNING
Removing
- OPEN circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring  (page 23-2)
- Remove front panel  (page 23-4)
3
5 Nm
PH 2 44 lb-in
During installation
5
4
9 – 49
6 Remove connectors
N sensor 1)
X24 BSS module 1)
Current sensors
X20
1) Equipment dependent on type Energy transducer

X21
PH 1
1,2 ± 0,3 Nm
11 lb-in
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

After replacing the trip unit, always test with the handheld test device  (page 9-99)
For ordering trip units, please refer to the latest version of the "Selection and Application Guide" WL Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker
catalog.
If a trip unit with another configuration than the existing one is installed, the Catalog No. on the options label of the circuit breaker must be
changed according to the catalog data.
Please contact the technical assistance hotline if you have any queries.
9 – 50
9.1.10 Internal trip unit self-test on
the overcurrent tripping function
For commissioning and function testing.
Conditions
- Trip unit is activated by:
operating current
external 24 V DC voltage supply
- Current not in overload range
 Indicators (page 9-9)
Internal circuit breaker self-test without tripping
Normal operation of the circuit breaker is not impaired
The test can be canceled

at any time by pressing CLEAR
Running light
2 All indicators will light up one after other (from left to right or from top to bottom)
The flashing time corresponds to the long-time delay tR The flashing time deviates more than 10% from the set long-time
3
delay tR
The L-tripping indicator lights up T.U. ERROR indicator lights up Test not OK
4
Test OK Test not OK Trip unit is defective, even if the L-tripping indicator lights up
- LED goes out after 30 sec.

- End of internal self-test
5
- Premature ending of test by
pressing CLEAR
Trip unit OK Testing with handheld test device  Handheld test device (page 9-99)
6
9 – 51
NOTICE
Internal circuit breaker self-test with tripping
The test can be canceled

at any time by pressing CLEAR
1 2 3
1
0075-01-02
Press and hold CLEAR Press and hold TEST Release both buttons at the same time
Running light
2
All indicators will light up one after other (from left to right or from top to bottom)
3 The flashing time corresponds to the long-time delay tR The flashing time deviates more than 10% from the set long-time
delay tR
Circuit breaker trips Circuit breaker does not trip Test not OK
4
Test OK Test not OK Trip unit is defective, even if the circuit breaker trips
q Reclosing a circuit breaker trip- Test with handheld test device

5 ped by the trip unit (page 6-9) - Check wiring between trip unit and tripping coil
- Test tripping coil
9 – 52
9.1.11 Sealing and locking device
lock
2 1
2 remove
seal
NOTE
Keep sealing wire as short as possible.
Catalog No.
ETU745 WLTUSC55
ETU776 WLTUSC76
9 – 53
9.2 CubicleBUS Modules
9.2.1 System architecture
PROFIBUS-DP
Modbus RTU
PROFINET IO
Modbus TCP
(see Note 1)
Close/Open (see Note 1)
COM15/16/35
X6
TD400
1) See communication manual for relay details.
- AO: Analog output module

- BSS: Breaker Status Sensor for acquisition of signals about the circuit breaker status (always combined with COM module)
- c: Internal bus system for interconnection of circuit breaker components and for connection of external c
modules
- COM15/16/35: Communications modules to connect breaker-internal CubicleBUS to external supervisory systems via 
PROFIBUS-DP, Modbus RTU, PROFINET IO or Modbus TCP. Always combined with the BSS (Breaker Status Sensor).
- DI: Digital input module for capturing the status of ungrounded (potential-free) status signals for the purpose of communicating
them or switching active parameter set (ETU776). A maximum of 2 modules in different configurations can be connected.
- DO: Digital output modules with 6 outputs each; a maximum of three modules with different configurations or versions can be
connected
- ETU: Electronic trip unit
- Metering: Metering function or metering function PLUS
- Modbus TCP: Fieldbus for connection of energy management systems and automation systems
- Open / Close: Opening coil and closing coil for opening and closing the circuit breaker via communication
- PROFIBUS DP/PROFINET IO: Field bus for connection of automation components
- Protection: Protection module
- TD400: Test Device; adapter for parameterizing, operating and monitoring the circuit breaker via powerconfig
- VT: Voltage transformer
- ZSI: Module for zone selective interlocking, must always be connected as the first module
NOTE
The basic functions of the electronic trip units do not require an auxiliary power supply.
To use extended functions of the trip units requiring data exchange via the c, an external 24 V DC voltage supply 
must be connected.  (page 9-98)
9 – 54
9.2.2 Internal modules
9.2.2.1 Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)
For collecting circuit breaker status information via signaling switches and transmitting these data to the c.
Trip Unit
UVR or 2nd shunt trip
Springs
0206-3
Signaling switches for BSS
(5) (6) (7)
(8)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(1) Spring charge signaling switch

(2) Signaling switch OPEN / CLOSE position S44
(3) "Ready-to-close" signaling switch
(4) S45 Bell Alarm signaling switch
(5) Signaling switch for connected position S46
(6) Signaling switch for test position S47
(7) Signaling switch for disconnected position S48
(8) Signaling switch S43 UVR or 2nd shunt trip
9 – 55
Installing the BSS module
DANGER
WARNING
Always discharge the closing spring before removing any covers or the front panel of the circuit breaker (page 23-2).
Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle (page 23-3) and Removing front panel (page 23-4).

Replace the trip unit (page 9-49).
2 3
(1) BSS
(2) Actuating shaft
(3) BSS
(4) "Ready-to-close" indicator
(5) Drive shaft
(6) Carrier
9 – 56
Attaching signaling switch S43 to the 2nd shunt trip / UVR
(1)
(2)
UVR / 2nd shunt trip: signaling switch S 43 (3)
(4)
(1) Rocker
(2) Signaling switch
(3) Guide
(4) Groove
Attaching signaling switch S45 to the ETU carriage
(1) S45
(1) black wiring
9 – 57
Connecting BSS module
The first cconnection leads to the secondary disconnect block X8. The second cconnection is made according to the
circuit breaker equipment.
 Circuit diagrams (page 8-1)
(1) ETU745 - 776 without metering function

(2) ETU745 - 776 with metering function
(3) X51-X52 External conducted cubicle bus link does only exist in release 1. release 2 uses an internal link
9 – 58
9.2.2.2 COM module
General
The communication modules permit access to the circuit breaker via their respective fieldbus interface:
- Reading and writing parameters
- Reading circuit breaker states
- Reading measured values
- Transmitting messages and alarms
- Transmitting maintenance information
- Sensing the position of the circuit breaker in the guide frame
- Additional functions via internal inputs and outputs
- Closing and opening the circuit breaker via fieldbus
- Implementing circuit breaker-internal CubicleBUS information
Further information can be found in the system manuals of the respective communication modules:
3WL circuit breakers with communication capability via the COM35 communication module - PROFINET IO, Modbus TCP
https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/109757987
System manual for 3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System manual for 3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - PROFIBUS
IT Security
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is necessary to implement – and continuously
maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such
a concept. For more information about industrial security, please visit https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity
Note
This product is intended for industrial environments (Environment A, in accordance with IEC 60947-1/-2).In residential environ-
ments, this device can cause unwanted radio interferences.In this case, it is the user's responsibility to address accordingly.
9 – 59
Fitting COM module on the guide frame
- Switch off and discharge the storage spring 

→ (page 23-2)
- Pull the breaker into maintenance position → (page 23-3)
2
S48 S47 S46
COM module COM module
S46, S47 und S48:

Signaling switch for sensing the position of the circuitbreaker in the guide frame for forwarding to the respective fieldbus and
the c
9 – 60
Attaching the position indicating module to the withdrawable circuit breaker
For actuating signaling switches S46, S47 and S48.
Lift slightly only

1 Spring loaded pin
2
Operating module
Dummy auxiliary plug X7
For frame size II and frame size III, L & C-class:
2
1
PZ 3
9 – 61
Fitting COM module on the fixed-mounted breaker
COM module
Operating module 1
2
3 x Plastite RX-PT 8-16x12
PZ 2
Connecting wires
→ Circuit diagrams (page 8-1)
Note
If necessary, missing auxiliary terminals may be added 
(receptacle, auxiliary connectors and sliding contact module 
for guide frames). → (page 5-11)
PROFINET IO
Modbus TCP
PROFIBUS DP
Modbus RTU
(1) Secondary connector X8

(2) Connecting cable to first external c-module or 
terminating resistor
(3) Connecting cable to secondary connector X8
Designation Assignment Terminal
X8-1 c- X8.1
X8-2 c+ X8.2
X8-3 24 V DC + X8.3
X8-4 24 V DC GND X8.4
NOTICE
If no external c-modules are connected to the COM
module, the terminating resistor must be plugged into the
cterminal. Absence of the terminating resistor can
cause errors and potentially loss of communications.
9 – 62
Connections for additional inputs and outputs
IEC 61558 SELV/PELV – UL 1310 Class 2 Power Supply Only
Max. Current
Voltage
COM15/16 COM35
Power Supply: 125 mA 125 mA
Write Enable: 10 mA 10 mA
Free IN: 10 mA 10 mA
24 V DC
Free OUT: 400 mA 400 mA (1A@Tamb < 40°C)
Close: 400 mA 400 mA
Open 400 mA 400 mA
Ratings at Tambient < 70°C

More detailed information about the use of these inputs and outputs can be found in the relevant system manuals
9 – 63
9.2.2.3 COM35 module
The COM35 communications module permits access to the circuit breaker via the fieldbus protocols PROFINET IO and Modbus TCP.
The COM35 also features:
- Ethernet switch functionality
- Both protocols may be used simultaneously on both ports
- Dynamic Arc Sentry (DAS) via the COM35 inputs and outputs
- Signed firmware update
- Tripped signal (bell alarm) via the COM35 output

(1) Input/output terminals for user connection to additional functions

(2) RJ45 sockets for PROFINET IO and Modbus TCP connection
(3) Function-select button
(4) Activity LED PROFINET IO
(5) Activity LED Modbus TCP
(6) Activity LED c
(7) Connections to the secondary disconnect contact system X8
(8) cconnection for connecting external cmodules or a c terminating resistor
Note
The COM35 module can be specified as part of the circuit
breaker catalog number or ordered separately:
WLCOM35: Includes COM35 module and mounting hardware.
WLCOM35RET: Retrofit kit including COM35, BSS and all
required components to retrofit communications into a breaker.
9 – 64
Indicators
LED Indication Meaning
green Normal PROFINET IO communcation

Communication with PROFINET IO
green 
Controller, no communication with
flashing
PROFINET IO PROFINET IO Supervisor
No communication with PROFINET IO

red Controller, no communication with
PROFINET IO Supervisor
At least one opened Modbus TCP

green
connection
Modbus TCP green  Ethernet link available but no Modbus

flashing TCP connection
off No Ethernet link
off No cparticipant active
green ccommunication operating

c green  No ETU installed (e.g: non-automatic/
flashing disconnect switch application)
red cerror
Utilizing the programmable DAS function of the COM35:
24V DC
DAS switch DAS Status indicator

ON/OFF
The COM35, exclusively, provides the ability to activate the DAS function of the WLETU776 directly via the COM35’s programmable I/O.
When the COM35 is programmed to enable this function, opening the connection between terminals 1 and 3 will cause the trip unit to switch
to Parameter Set B. When contact is made between these two terminals, the trip unit will utilize Parameter Set A. The programmable output
can then be used to activate a local status indicator (as illustrated). This COM35 I/O functionality must be programmed by the user via 
Siemens powerconfig software.
The programable output can carry a load of 1A, up to an ambient temperature of 45C (113F). Above that, the current–carrying capability of
the output should be de-rated to 400mA at 70C (158F). The length of the wires connecting the activation switch to the input of the COM35
should be less than 50m (165ft) and be AWG18. Twisted/shielded-pair wiring is recommended for cable runs approaching this length.
9 – 65
The COM15 communication module allows access to the circuit breaker via the PROFIBUS DP fieldbus interface.
Overview
(1) Connection terminals for additional inputs and outputs to provide special functions
(2) SUB-D plug, 9-pole, for PROFIBUS DP connection
(3) c LED
(4) PROFIBUS DP-LED
(5) Connecting cables to secondary connector X8
(6) c connection for connecting external c-modules or for the terminating resistor
Indicators
LED Indication Significance
off No 24v dc power connected

PROFIBUS
green PROFIBUS DP communication active
DP
red Bus fault or bus not responding
No c-modules found or 
off
no 24v dc power connected
green c communication active
c
green  cdevice found, but no 
flashing connection to ETU or metering function
red c error
9 – 66
The COM16 communication module permits access to the circuit breaker via the Modbus RTU fieldbus interface.
Overview
(1) Connection terminals for additional inputs and outputs to provide special functions
(2) SUB-D plug, 9-pole, for Modbus RTU connection
(3) cLED
(4) Modbus RTU LED
(5) Connecting cables to secondary connector X8
(6) c connection for connecting external c
modules or for the terminating resistor
Installation and operation
Assembly is done as for the COM35 module:

for the guide frame → (page 9-60)
for fixed-mounted breakers → (page 9-62)
Installation and operating is described in the system handbook with document order number 3ZX1012-0WL10-1AC1. 
It can be downloaded free of charge from:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/39850157
Indicators
off No 24v dc power connected

PROFIBUS
green Modbus communication functioning
DP
red No Modbus communication or timeout
No c-modules found or 
off
no 24v dc power connected
green c communication active

c
green  cdevice found, but no 
flashing connection to ETU or metering function
red c error
9 – 67
Modbus RTU interface
The COM16 module is equipped with a 3-wire RS485 interface. The Modbus RTU connector is a 9-pin female Sub-D connector with the
following pinout:
Pin
1 RS485 Reference
5 Transceiver Terminal 1, V1 voltage
9 Transceiver Terminal 0, V0 voltage
2-4, 6-8 Not connected
Cables connecting COM16 modules via RS485 must contain three insulated conductors and a shield. The three isolated conductors 
connect to Pins 1, 5 & 9. The RS485 Reference must only be grounded at one end, preferably at the master. Grounding the RS485 
Reference in multiple locations can allow common mode voltages to be imposed on the RS485 Transceiver terminals which can prevent
communication and potentially damage the device.
The cable shield must only be grounded at one end, preferably at the master. Grounding the shield in multiple locations can allow circulating
ground currents in the shield which can prevent successful communication.
Write Enable input

The COM16 Module is equipped with an input that must be activated to allow the module to accept remote control commands as well as
remote parameterization. When this input is not active, the module will reject all incoming packets that would normally change the state of
an output (open/close circuit breaker) or change protective parameters. Normal polling and communication of data are not affected.
The following commands are blocked if the Write Enable input is inactive:
- opening/closing circuit breaker
- resetting after a trip
- Changing any protective function parameters and extended protective function parameters
- changing any communications parameter (e.g. address)
- changing any parameter of the metering function (e.g. demand period length)
- resetting any diagnostic or service-related counter or indicator
- setting/resetting outputs of the digital output modules
The following commands are always allowed, independent of the state of the Write Enable input:
- changing and setting the trigger settings of the waveform capture function
- reading the contents of the waveform buffer
- changing alarm and setpoint function settings
- changing any of the customer-changeable text strings
- resetting the min/max log
- setting/resetting the "Free Output" of the COM16 module
- setting system time
9 – 68
Modbus RTU Functionality
Transmission Protocol
The COM16 module operates in the RTU transmission mode. ASCII transmission mode is not supported.
Overview of supported Functions

The COM16 module provides the following Modbus RTU function codes for accessing the data contained in the WL circuit breaker.
FC Name Description
02: Read Discrete Inputs Reads the state of the Bits in the Status Register
01: Read Coils Reads the state of multiple Control Bits and Extra Flags
05: Write Single Coil Sets the state of a single Control Bit or Extra Flag
15: Write Multiple Coils Sets the state of multiple Control Bits and Extra Flags
04: Read Input Registers Reads the Basic Data Registers. Three Basic Types (1, 2 and 3) are supported.
03: Read Holding Registers Reads a complete data set.
16: Write Multiple Registers Writes a complete data set.
07: Read Exception Status Reads the state of eight Exception Status bits
Function provides a method for checking the communication between the master
08: Diagnostics
and the slave
11: Get Comm Event Counter Returns a status word and an event count from the communications event counter
12: Get Comm Event Log Returns a status word, event count, message count, and a field of event bytes
9 – 69
Modbus RTU Communication settings
For Modbus RTU communication, the following settings must be made in the COM16 module: baud rate, serial transmission configuration,
Modbus RTU address.
Modbus RTU Slave Address

The Modbus RTU communication address range of the COM16 module is 1 through 126.
Modbus RTU address 0 is used as a broadcast address in Modbus RTU systems.
Modbus RTU address 0xF1(hex) is defined as a broadcast address for COM16 modules.
The Modbus RTU slave address is assigned to data point 5 and may be changed by writing a new address value to high-byte of register
40962 (0xA002). If the COM16 module receives an invalid slave address value, the invalid value will be ignored.
Baud Rate
Baud rate settings of 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 and 19200 are supported. 19200 baud is the default setting. The baud rate is assigned to data
point 427 and may be changed by writing a new baud rate value to high-byte of register 40984 (0xA022). The following numbers are used to
identify the selected baud rate. If the COM16 module receives an invalid baud rate, the invalid baud rate will be ignored.
Number Baud rate
0 1200
1 2400
2 4800
3 9600
4 19200
Parity
Parity settings of "No Parity", "Odd Parity" and "Even Parity" are supported. "Even Parity" is the default setting. The parity is assigned to data
point 428 and may be changed by writing a new parity value to the low-byte of register 40994 (0xA022). The following numbers are used to
identify the selected parity. If the COM16 module receives an invalid parity, the invalid parity will be ignored.
Number Parity
0 No Parity
1 Odd Parity
2 Even Parity
Auto configuration of baud rate and parity

The factory settings for baud rate and parity are 19200 baud and "Even Parity". These settings may be changed either by writing from the
master to data points 427 and 428 in register 40994 (0xA022) or via the auto configuration process. The auto configuration process only
occurs when the supply voltage is switched on.
When the supply voltage is switched on, the COM16 module monitors the bus activity. If the COM16 module detects bus activity but cannot
receive any valid data, the auto configuration process is started. The module cycles through all combinations of baud rate and parity until it
finds the combination which allows it to receive valid data. This combination is then saved and the auto configuration process ended.
If the COM16 module does not find a combination that allows it to receive valid data after cycling through all combinations, it will adopt the
original settings for baud rate and parity, and the auto configuration process will be ended.
The time required to complete the auto configuration process can be several seconds depending on:
- Baud rate
- How often the master transmits a telegram
- The length of the messages transmitted by the master
- The number of tests required to detect a valid baud rate/parity combination
9 – 70
Changing the communication parameters
The communication parameters of the COM16 module can be changed by writing the required parameters (baud rate, serial configuration
and Modbus RTU communication address) in data set 160.
Dataset 160 Communication Parameters
Address: A000 hex, Registers: 36, Access: Read / Write
HIGH/
LOW Data Source Source Source
Register Byte Byte Description point WL VL1 VL2 Format Length Scaling
40960 0 Header; value 0x00 00 00 00 — COM16 COM11 COM21 — 32 —
40962 4 HIGH Reserved — — — — — 8 —
5 LOW Modbus RTU address 5 COM16 COM11 COM21 Unsigned char 8 0
40963 6 HIGH Basic data type (1, 2 or 3) 6 COM16 COM11 COM21 Unsigned char 8 —
7 LOW Reserved — — — — — 8 —
Changeable data points in the

40964 8 7 COM16 COM11 COM21 Unsigned char 224 —
basic data
40984 48 HIGH Modbus baud rate 427 COM16 COM11 COM21 Unsigned char 8 —
49 LOW Modbus parity 428 COM16 COM11 COM21 Unsigned char 8 —
40994 68 HIGH Property for Byte 49 — COM16 COM11 COM21 Property byte 8 —
69 LOW Property for Byte 48 — COM16 COM11 COM21 Property byte 8 —
40995 70 HIGH Reserved — — — — Property byte 8 —
71 LOW Property for Byte 5 — COM16 COM11 COM21 Property byte 8 —
73 LOW Reserved — — — — Property byte 8 —
75 LOW Reserved — — — — Property byte 8 —
78 Total Bytes
Note: Registers not listed are reserved.

For details on data formats and properties, see "SENTRON WL VL circuit breakers with communication capability MODBUS" manual.
9 – 71
Modbus RTU function codes
In addition to the Modbus RTU function codes of the COM16 module, described on page 9-68, the following definitions of the Status Regis-
ter, Control Bits, Extra Flags, Basic Types and Exception Status Bits apply to the COM16 module.
Status Register
The Status Register provides WL status information to the Modbus RTU master. The Status Register is accessed using the following func-
tions:
- 02 Read Input Status Discretes
- 04 Read Input Registers
Bit number WL
Circuit breaker position

00 = disconnected position
0, 1 01 = connected position
10 = test position
11 = circuit breaker not present
Circuit breaker status

00 = not ready
01 = circuit breaker open
2, 3
10 = circuit breaker closed
11 = circuit breaker tripped
4 Circuit Breaker is "Ready-to-close"
5 Undervoltage release
6 Closing spring charged
7 Overload warning
8 Setpoints active
9 Warning(s) active
10 Modbus RTU "Write enable" input active
11 User input
Trip
000 = no trip
001 = overload trip
010 = instantaneous short-circuit trip
011 = short time delayed short-circuit trip
12, 13, 14 100 = ground-fault trip
101 = trip caused by extended protective function
110 = N conductor trip
15 Load shedding
9 – 72
Control Bits and Extra Flags
Control Bits and Extra Flags make it possible for the Modbus RTU master to control various WL functions.
The Control Bits and Extra Flags are accessed using the following functions:
- 01 Read Coils
- 05 Write Single Coil
- 15 Write Multiple Coils
Bit number WL
Breaker open / close

00 = no action
Control Bits 01 = open circuit breaker
0, 1
10 = close circuit breaker
11 = no action
2 clear reason for trip
3 Not used
User output
4 0 = User output Off
1 = User output On
5 Not used
6 Not used
7 Not used
Extra Flags 8, 9 not used

10 Clear log book
11 Clear all min/max values
Clear temperature
12
min/max values
13 Not used
14 Clear maintainance counters

Synchronize system clock at a rising edge
15
Sets the time to xx:30:00:00
Byte Order
Data points larger than two bytes transmitted in the Motorola Format (Big-Endian).
Byte Order Type of Data
Byte 0 Byte 0 char, unsigned char
Byte 1 Byte 1
Byte 0 High Byte signed int, unsigned int
Byte 1 Low Byte
Byte 0 High Byte High Word signed long, unsigned long
Byte 1 Low Byte
Byte 2 High Byte Low Word
Byte 3 Low Byte
9 – 73
Basic Data Types
Basic data types 1, 2 and 3 are supported. Basic data type 1 is the default setting. Basic data type 1 consists of 7 registers,
basic data type 2 consists of 13 registers and Basic data type 3 consists of 22 registers.
Basic data is accessed using the function:
04 Read Input Registers - Reads the Basic Data including the Status Register
Basic Data Type 1 Registers and Default Data Points
Register Byte Name Default Data Point – WL
1 0, 1 Status Register WL status bits
2 2, 3 Data Block 1 Phase L1 current
5 8, 9 Data Block 4 Current in phase under highest load
6 10 Block 1 property byte Property byte of phase L1 current
11 Block 2 property byte Property byte of phase L2 current
13 Block 4 property byte Property byte of max current in phase under highest load
9 – 74
6 10, 11 Data Block 5 Current in neutral conductor
7 12, 13 Data Block 6 Average phase-to-phase voltage
8 14, 15 Data Block 7 Average power factors of 3 phases
9 16, 17 Data Block 8 Total active energy of 3 phasesa)
21 Block 4 property byte Property byte of current in phase under highest load
12 22 Block 5 property byte Property byte of current in neutral conductor
23 Block 6 property byte Property byte of average phase-to-phase voltage
13 24 Block 7 property byte Property byte of average power factors of 3 phases
25 Block 8 property byte Property byte of total active energy of 3 phases
a) Only 2 bytes of the 4 byte data point will be communicated (range: 0 - 65535 MWh)
9 – 75
6 10, 11 Data Block 5 Current in neutral conductor
7 12, 13 Data Block 6 Phase-to-phase voltage L1 to L2
10 18, 19 Data Block 9 Phase-to-neutral voltage L1
13 24, 25 Data Block 12 Average power factor of 3 phases
14 26, 27 Data Block 13 Total active energy of 3 phases*
15 28, 29 Data Block 14 Total apparent power of 3 phases
33 Block 4 property byte Property byte of current in phase under highest load
18 34 Block 5 property byte Property byte of current in neutral conductor
35 Block 6 property byte Property byte of phase-to-phase voltage L1 to L2
19 36 Block 7 property byte Property byte of phase-to-phase voltage L2 to L3
37 Block 8 property byte Property byte of phase-to-phase voltage L3 to L1
20 38 Block 9 property byte Property byte of phase-to-neutral voltage L1
39 Block 10 property byte Property byte of phase-to-neutral voltage L2
21 40 Block 11 property byte Property byte of phase-to-neutral voltage L3
41 Block 12 property byte Property byte of average power factors of 3 phases
22 42 Block 13 property byte Property byte of total active energy of 3 phasesa)
43 Block 14 property byte Property byte of total apparent power of 3 phases
* Only 2 bytes of the 4 byte data point will be communicated (range: 0 - 65535 MWh)
9 – 76
Exception Status Bits
The Exception Status Bits are accessed using the following functions:
07 Read Exception Status - Reads the state of the Exception Status Bits
Bit Description
0 Excessive breaker contact wear
1 Communication with trip unit OK
2 COM16 is OK
3-7 Reserved
Further information about the application of these inputs and outputs is given in the "WL Modbus RTU Communication Manual" WL
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker catalog.
Catalog number
Catalog No.
WL Breaker Configuration Software POWERCONFIG
9.2.2.6 Metering function PLUS
Trip units ETU745 - ETU776 can be equipped with a metering function PLUS. This, however, requires external voltage transformers
providing a three-phase metering voltage (such as the Siemens WL3VT).
This data can be shown on the display of the trip units, transmitted by the COM module via PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET IO, Modbus RTU, 
or Modbus TCP, and passed on to the outputs of external c modules. Based on this data, conclusions can be drawn about the
condition of the power system. To use the metering function without communication, an external 24 V auxiliary voltage supply is required.
NOTICE
High voltages may damage the MeteringPLUS module.
The secondary voltage of the external voltage transformers must not exceed 150 V AC RMS or 300 V AC peak value.
In addition to the values for the currents, the metering function PLUS provides data on voltages, powers, energy values, power factors and
frequency via the cfor further processing.
9 – 77
These data can be shown on the display of the trip units, transmitted to the PROFIBUS DP via the COM15 module or to the Modbus RTU
via the COM16 module and transferred to the outputs of external cmodules. Based on these data, conclusions can be drawn
about the condition of the power system.
Measured parameter Range Accuracy1)
Currents IL1, IL2, IL3, IN 30 - 8000 A ± 1 % of measurement range
Ground current measured per GF mode setting  100 - 1200 ± 5 % of measurement range
(residual or direct sense).
Line-to-line voltages UL12, UL23, UL31 15 - 130 V ± 5 % of read value
130 - 1150 V ± 1 % of measurement range
Line-to-neutral-line voltages UL1N, UL2N, UL3N 10 - 75 V ± 5 % of read value

Average line-to-line voltages UavgD 15 - 130 V ± 5 % of read value

Average line-to-neutral-line voltages UavgY 10 - 75 V ± 5 % of read value
Apparent power SL1, SL2, SL3 13 - 8000 kVA ± 2 % of measurement range

± 2 % vom Messbereich
Total apparent power 13 - 24000 kVA ± 2 % of measurement range
Active power PL1, PL2, PL3 -8000 - +8000 kW ± 2 % of apparent power (P.F.> 0.6)
Total active power -24000 - +24000 kW ± 2 % of apparent power (P.F.> 0,6)
Reactive power QL1, QL2, QL3 -6400 - +6400 kVar ± 4 % of apparent power
Total reactive power -20000 - +20000 kVar ± 4 % of apparent power
Power factors cosL1, cos L2, cos L3, -0,6 - 1 - +0.6 ± 0.04
-0.6 - 1 - +0,6 ± 0,04
Power factor total -0.6 - 1 - +0.6 ± 0.04

-0,6 - 1 - +0,6 ± 0,04
Ampere demand per phase of currents IL1, IL2, IL3 30 - 8000 A ± 1 % of measurement range
3-phase ampere demand 30 - 8000 A ± 1 % of measurement range
Active power demand per phase in L1, L2, L3 13 - 8000 kW ± 2 % of apparent power (P.F. > 0.6)
3-phase active power demand 13 - 8000 kW ± 2 % of measurement range
Apparent power demand per phase in L1, L2, L3 13 - 8000 kVA ± 2 % of measurement range
3-phase apparent power demand 13 - 8000 kVA ± 2 % of measurement range
3-phase reactive power demand -8000 - +8000 kVar ± 4 % of apparent power
Active energy in the normal direction 1 - 10000 MWh ±2%
Active energy in the reverse direction 1 - 10000 MWh ±2%
Reactive energy in the normal direction 1 - 10000 MVarh ±2%
Reactive energy in the reverse direction 1 - 10000 MVarh ±2%
Frequency 15 - 40 Hz ± 0.1 Hz
40 - 70 Hz ± 0,1 Hz
70 - 440 Hz
Total harmonic distortion of current and voltage 2 - 100 % ± 2 % of measurement range up to 29th harmonic
Phase unbalance of current and voltage2) 2 - 150 % ± 1 % of displayed value

1)
The given measured value tolerances are valid for one year based on an average operating temperature of 25 °C. After this period, deviations may occur.
The given tolerances for measured values for which the measured voltage is consumed when being determined are only valid if the voltage measurement
is carried out with an accuracy of 0.5 %.
2)
ANSI definition: Ratio of the largest difference between the phases and the average of all 3 phases.
9 – 78
Extended metering functions
The metering function PLUS is used to implement extended protective functions beyond the functionality of the trip units.
Parameter Range Delay
Undervoltage 100 - 1100 V 0 - 15 sec.

Overvoltage 200 - 1200 V 0 - 15 sec.
Active power in normal direction 1 - 12000 kW 0 - 15 sec.
Active power in reverse direction 1 - 12000 kW 0 - 15 sec.

Overfrequency 40 - 70 Hz 0 - 15 sec.
Underfrequency 40 - 70 Hz 0 - 15 sec.
Phase current unbalance 1) 5 - 50% 0 - 15 sec.
Phase voltage unbalance 1) 5 - 50% 0 - 15 sec.
Phase rotation
Pickup THD current 3 - 50% 5 - 15 sec.
Pickup THD voltage 3 - 50% 5 - 15 sec.

1) ANSI definition:
Ratio of the largest difference between the phases and the average of all 3 phases.
If one of these parameters exceeds or falls below its default settings, the trip unit is tripped after the adjusted delay via the c.
The parameters can be adjusted via:
9 – 79
Setpoints
The setpoint function can be used to signal or record special events in the power system.
Parameter Range Delay
Phase overcurrent 30 - 10000 A 0 - 255 sec.

Ground overcurrent 30 - 12000 A 0 - 255 sec.
Neutral overcurrent 30 - 10000 A 0 - 255 sec.
phase current unbalance* 5 - 50% 0 - 255 sec.

current demand 30 - 10000 A 0 - 255 sec.
undervoltage 100 - 1100 V 0 - 255 sec.
phase voltage unbalance* 5 - 50% 0 - 255 sec.
overvoltage 100 - 1100 V 0 - 255 sec.
overpower in normal direction 1 - 12000 kW 0 - 255 sec.
KW reverse 1 - 12000 kW 0 - 255 sec.
KW demand 1 - 12000 kW 0 - 255 sec.

KVA demand 1 - 12000 kVA 0 - 255 sec.
KVAR demand 1 - 12000 kVar 0 - 255 sec.
KVAR consumed 1 - 12000 kVar 0 - 255 sec.

KVAR delivered 1 - 12000 kVar 0 - 255 sec.
KVA 1 - 12000 kVA 0 - 255 sec.
overfrequency 40 - 70 Hz 0 - 255 sec.

underfrequency 40 - 70 Hz 0 - 255 sec.
Under-PF (power factor) -0.001 - 0.001 0 - 255 sec.
Over-PF (power factor) -0.001 - 0.001 0 - 255 sec.

current THD 3 - 50% 0 - 255 sec.
voltage THD 3 - 50% 0 - 255 sec.
crest factor 1 - 2.55 0 - 255 sec.

form factor 1 - 2.55 0 - 255 sec.
1) ANSI definition:
Ratio of the largest difference between the phases and the average of all 3 phases.
If one of these parameters exceeds or falls below its default settings, the trip unit is tripped after the adjusted delay via the c.
The parameters can be adjusted via:
- the graphical display (ETU776).
9 – 80
Additional functions
The metering function Plus offers two additional functions:

- two independent waveform buffers
- harmonic analysis
The two independent waveform buffers can be used to analyze the current and voltage values at the time of the event.
If the waveform buffers are programmed to "recording" (standard setting), continuous recording takes place until a previously defined event
occurs. Then, the recording is stopped, and the current or voltage waveforms at the time of the event can be observed on a visual display
(graphical LCD, laptop or PC). The time window is one second; the resolution is 1649 values/second.
Settings for waveform buffers

Currents IL1, IL2, IL3, ILN, Ig
Voltages UL1, UL2, UL3
The waveform buffers can also be started or stopped individually via the communication channels (PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET IO, 
Modbus TCP, Modbus RTU, c).
The waveform buffers can be parameterized via:
9 – 81
9.2.2.7 Connecting voltage transformers
DANGER
The metering module ("MeterPLUS Function") can be set to expect 3W or 4W (LL/LG) connections and will correct the amplitude and phase
of the signal as necessary.
The parameters on the trip unit must be set as follows:
(1) VT Primary voltage (100 V ac ... 1200 V ac)
(2) VT Secondary voltage
(100 V/110 V/120 V)
(3) VT Connection 
(Wye / LG, Delta / LL)
Three VTs must be used at all times.

All three VTs must be rated for the rated LL voltage (e.g. 480 V) and can have either 100 V / 110 V or 120 V secondary rated voltage.
3:3W System: Delta (L-L) Connection 3:3W System: Delta (L-L) Connection
Rotation: A-B-C Rotation: A-C-B
primary bus VT primary Primary (assuming 480V LL) Secondary Primary (assuming 480V LL) Secondary
configuration connection
L1 to X8.5 L1 to X8.5
VL-L V1-2 120V VL-L V1-2 120V
VL-L (480V) (480V)
L2 to X8.6 L2 to X8.6
V2-3 V2-3
208V 208V
L3 to X8.7 L3 to X8.7
Metering VT Settings: V3-1 V3-1
Delta/Wye : Delta
VT Primary: 480 (for instance) to X8.8 to X8.8
VT Secondary: 120 (for instance)
3:4W System: Wye (L-N, L-G) Connection

primary bus VT primary
configuration connection
Primary (assuming 480V LL) Secondary
L1 to X8.5
(VL-L)/√3 120V/ √3 (69V)
(277V)
(VL-L)/√3
L2 to X8.6
VL-L
120V
(480V)
L3 to X8.7
Metering VT Settings: 69V
Delta/Wye : Wye
VT Primary: 480 (for instance) LN to X8.8
VT Secondary: 120 (for instance)
Note: Required primary and secondary overcurrent protection (fusing) not shown for clarity.
9 – 82
9.2.3 External CublicleBUS modules
9.2.3.1 General
Application
External cmodules are used for communication between the WL circuit breaker and the secondary equipment in the circuit
breaker panel. They are provided to control analog indications, transmit the circuit breaker tripping status and the reason for tripping 
and to read additional control signals. Furthermore, with one of these modules it is possible to implement a zone selective interlocking for
short-circuit protection.
cconnections at module:
X3-1 = Ground 24V DC
X3-2 = CubicleBUS -
X3-3 = CubicleBUS +
X3-4 = +24V DC
cconnections at breaker:
X8-1 = CubicleBUS -
X8-2 = CubicleBUS +
X8-3 = +24V DC
X8-4 = Ground 24V DC
(1) Indicator LED

(2) Rotary coding switch
(3) Connection X3: c
(4) Connection X5: inputs or outputs
(5) Connection X4: inputs or outputs
(8) "TEST" button
Installation
The external cmodules are snapped onto a standard 35-mm DIN rail inside the switchgear panel. It must be ensured that the
length of the connecting cable of the first module to the circuit breaker does not exceed 6.5 ft.
Connection setup
The cmodules must only be connected to each other and to the circuit breaker using the pre-assembled cables supplied. 
These cables are also used for the 24 V DC voltage supply of the cmodules.
If more than two cmodules are connected, the 24 V DC voltage supply must be fed via a separate cable from module to module.
Only one cmodule can be connected directly to a circuit breaker. Further modules must be connected from module to module.
Radial cables are not permissible.
If provided, the ZSI module is always the first module, and must be connected directly to the circuit breaker.
The ccable must be connected to the X3 connection of the last module with a 120  0.5 W resistor.
The total length of the ccables must not exceed 30 ft from auxiliary current plug X8 of the circuit breaker to the last
cmodule.
9 – 83
Circuit breaker without COM module
(1) Connecting cable to 1st module (4-conductor, conductors X8-4/X3-1 twisted with X8-3/X3-4 and X8-1/X3-2 twisted with X8-2/X3-3)
(2) Connecting cables between modules
(3) cmodules
(4) Terminating resistor 120  0.5 W
(5) Cable connection for 24 V DC voltage supply
9 – 84
Circuit breaker with COM module
(1) Only if there are more than 2 cmodules:

Connecting cables between the X8 and the first c module for 24 V DC voltage supply
(2) Connecting cables between cmodules
(3) cmodules
(4) Terminating resistor 120  0.5 W
(5) Connecting cables between the modules for 24 V DC voltage supply
(6) Connecting cable between the COM module and the first cmodule (with two RJ45 plugs)
(7) COM module
9 – 85
Changing settings

rotary switch is positioned
in this segment
3 x 0.5
1/8“
Indicators
green Module in operation
DEVICE yellow Module in test mode
red Module faulty
green Connection to cavailable

c
off No connection to c
yellow Option set or signal available

All other LEDs
off Option not set or no signal available
Module test
NOTICE
Unintended operation of the circuit breaker and other devices.
The test circuits of this unit emit real output signals that may cause operation of the circuit breaker and other devices that
may be connected to the associated cmodule.
During the test, the circuit breaker and downstream devices shoud be isolated to prevent unintended device operations.
The correct operation of the cmodules can be verified in the test mode. The test mode is started by pushing the "TEST" button
once. All outputs and the associated LEDs are switched off. The color of the DEVICE LED changes from green to yellow.
Testing inputs and outputs
Pressing the "TEST" Button Reaction
Twice quickly - LED 1 on

- Input/output 1 on
After a pause, - LED 1 and input/output 1 off, LED 2 on

twice quickly - Input/output 2 on

... ...

After a pause, once Input/output 6 off, all LEDs on
Once Test mode starts again, all inputs/outputs and the associated LEDs are off
Pushing the "TEST" button several times in quick succession when an LED is on switches the respective input/output on and off alternately.
9 – 86
Testing LEDs only
Pushing the "Test" button several times with pauses in between switches the LEDs on successively. After the last LED, all LEDs are
switched on.
Repeated pushing the "TEST" button starts the test mode again, and all LEDs, inputs and outputs are switched off.
Leaving the test mode

Do not press the "TEST" button for approximately 30 sec.
If all LEDs are on, the test mode will already be quitted after about 4 sec.
9.2.3.2 ZSI module
Function
When circuit breakers are combined with ZSI modules, a short-circuit occurring in systems with several grading levels can be precisely
localized.
For this purpose, all circuit breakers are interconnected via their ZSI modules.
When a short-circuit or ground-fault occurs, each circuit breaker affected by the short-circuit current queries its downstream circuit breaker
to determine whether the short-circuit is present in the next downstream device. Only the circuit breaker nearest the short-circuit, in the
upstream direction, is tripped. If "S" or "S+G" is selected on the ZSI module and the circuit breaker does not receive a blocking signal -
ZSI-IN - from its downstream circuit breaker, in the event of short-circuit, the delay time setting for the short-circuit trip is set to 50 ms. If a
short-circuit is detected, a blocking signal - ZSI-OUT - will be sent to the upstream circuit breakers. The trip takes place after 50 ms. It 
typically delays between 80 and 90 ms.
If "S" or "S+G" is selected on the ZSI module and the circuit breaker does not receive a blocking signal - ZSI-IN - from its downstream circuit
breaker, in the event of ground-fault, the delay time setting for the ground-fault trip is set to 100 ms.
If a ground-fault is detected, a blocking signal - ZSI-OUT - will be sent to the upstream circuit breakers. The trip takes place after 100 ms. 
It typically delays between 130 and 140 ms.
After a maximum delay time of 3 s, a given blocking signal ZSI-OUT is terminated.
Installation
 (page 9-83)
Connection
 Connection setup (page 9-83)
Only one ZSI module can be connected per circuit breaker.
If the ZSI module is used together with other cmodules, the ZSI module must be connected directly to the COM module or 
secondary terminal block X8.
9 – 87
Terminal assignment
Terminal Connection
Only for Tie Breakers;
TIE BRKR
Allows complete ZSI functionality in systems with tie breakers
ZSI IN ZSI modules of downstream circuit breakers

ZSI OUT ZSI modules of upstream circuit breakers
MV OUT Signal to the medium-voltage level
Observe the specified polarity when connecting: plus to plus and minus to minus.
The maximum wire length of the ZSI wiring is 400 m for a wire diameter of AWG 18 (2-wire conductor).
For ZSI connections between only WL circuit breakers, wire lengths of up to 1000 m are permissible if the conductor diameter is increased
to AWG 13.
The ZSI connections must consist of twisted pair cables or shielded cables.
The ZSI module allows connection of up to:
- 8 circuit breakers at the ZSI IN input and
- 20 circuit breakers at the ZSI OUT output
Note: Prior to testing the circuit breaker via primary injection and while 24v dc is applied to the trip unit and ZSI module, turn the rotary
switch to OFF. If this is not done, the trip unit will "remember" being part of the ZSI system and will always trip according to its ZSI time
(80ms) during a short-time overcurrent test instead of in its set delay.
Be sure to turn ZSI back on prior to re-energizing the system.
9 – 88
Settings
 Changing settings (page 9-86)
Settings ZSI module

OFF ZSI function deactivated
S ZSI module effective for short-time delayed short-circuits only
G ZSI-module effective for ground-fault protection only

ZSI-module effective for short-time delayed short-circuits and ground-fault
S+G
protection
TEST Test position for checking the ZSI functionality
Indicators
 (page 9-86)
Testing
 (page 9-86)
In addition, a special test feature of the ZSI module (rotary coding switch in TEST position) makes it possible to check the ZSI wiring and the
operativeness of the ZSI electronics.
9.2.3.3 Digital input module
Function
With the digital input module, up to 6 additional binary signals (DC 24 V) can be connected to the system.
These input signals are transferred to the PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET IO, Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP via the c, and can be
evaluated accordingly.
For trip units ETU776, it is possible as an alternative to use an input signal of this type at input 1 to switch between two different sets of pro-
tection parameters (if provided).
Installation
 (page 9-83)
Connection
A maximum of two digital input modules can be operated on the c at the same time
- 1 module with the "BUS INPUT" setting
- 1 module with the "PARAMETER SWITCH" setting
9 – 89
Terminal assignment
BUS
Input
Terminal assignment of digital input module

X4 Inputs 4-6
X5 Inputs 1-3
Settings
Settings of digital input module
PROFIBUS DP INPUT Inputs 1-6 are active.

If an input signal is present, a corresponding message is output via the 
COM module to the respective fieldbus.
PARAMETER SWITCH Input 1 is used for parameter switchover. All other inputs have no function.
No input signal (LED 1 not lights up):

Parameter set A activated
Input signal available (LED 1 lights up):
Parameter set B activated
NOTE
The parameter switchover query can be overruled by a query via the PROFIBUS DP, Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP / 
PROFINET IO-communication, the TD400 or the graphical display.
For further details please refer to "SENTRON 3WL / 3VL Circuit Breakers with communication capability - PROFIBUS DP”.
Indicators
 (page 9-86)
Testing
 (page 9-86)
9 – 90
9.2.3.4 Digital output modules
Function
With digital output modules, up to 6 signals can be transmitted.
If the trip unit signals an event, the corresponding LED lights up after the adjusted delay time has elapsed, and the module sets a signal at
the corresponding output.
Digital output modules are available in the following versions:
- with rotary coding switch and relay outputs
- configurable and with relay outputs
Installation
 (page 9-83)
Connection
If a combination of digital output modules with rotary switch and configurable digital outputs is to be connected to a circuit breaker, 
the following can be connected per circuit breaker:
- 1 digital output module with rotary coding switch and output assignment 1
- 1 digital output module with rotary coding switch and output assignment 2
- 1 configurable digital output module
9 – 91
Terminal assignment
Digital output modules with rotary switch
(1) (2) (3)
(1) Output assignment 1

(2) Delay time setting
(3) Output assignment 2
Configurable digital output modules
Terminal assignment of digital output module
X4 Outputs 4-6
X5 Outputs 1-3
9 – 92
Digital output modules with relay output provide changeover contacts at their outputs.
Current carrying capacity of the outputs
250 V AC, 12 A
Relay output
25 V DC, 12 A
Settings
Digital output modules with rotary coding switch

Terminal assignment 1 (TRIP)
L Signaling contact overload tripping
Signaling contact short-time delayed short-circuit

S
tripping
I Signaling contact instantaneous short-circuit tripping
G Signaling contact ground-fault tripping
G ALARM Signaling contact ground-fault alarm
N Signaling contact neutral conductor tripping
Delay time setting

TRIP 0 - 2 sec.
ALARM 0 - 2 sec.
The delay time setting determines how long a signal of the trip unit must be present until the corresponding LED lights up and the signal is
set at the corresponding output.
Output assignment 2 (ALARM)
Signaling contact leading signal overload tripping

PRE TRIP
(delay time 0 sec.)
TU ERR Signaling contact ETU error
LD SHED Signaling contact load shedding (delay time 0 sec.)
LD REST Signaling contact load restore (delay time 0 sec.)

TEMP Signaling contact temperature alarm
I UNBAL Signaling contact phase unbalance current
9 – 93
Configurable digital output modules
The configurable output module is pre-programmed with the most frequently-used events assigned to the outputs. The configuration can be
changed using:
- the with the TD400 through the test connector of the trip unit
- through a COM module using the PC software "powerconfig"  (page 28-2).
Default Event Settings
1: Parameter Set B Active

2: Load Shed Alarm Active
3: Circuit Breaker Open
4: Circuit Breaker Tripped

5: Parameter Set B Active
6: Circuit Breaker Closed
Indicators
 (page 9-86)
Testing
 (page 9-86)
9 – 94
9.2.3.5 Analog output module
Function
With the analog output module, analog measured values can be transmitted, which can be shown on the cubicle door by means 
of moving-coil instruments. A total of 4 outputs is available.
For the output signal, two different formats can be selected:
- 4 - 20 mA, output via terminal strip X5
- 0 - 10 V, output via terminal strip X4
Installation
 (page 9-83)
Connection
A maximum of 2 analog output modules can be connected; the rotary coding switches of these modules must, however, have different
settings.
Terminal assignment
Settings
The measured values to be signaled are adjusted using the rotary switch. They are always present on the two terminal strips in the
corresponding format.
The following values are available at the outputs:
Output assignment
Position AO 1 AO 2 AO 3 AO 4
I IL1 IL2 IL3 IN
U UL12 UL23 UL31 UL1N
P PL1 PL2 PL3 Stotal

f f ULLavg Ptotal P.F.avg
P.F. P.F.L1 P.F.L2 P.F.L3 Phase unbalance current in%
9 – 95
Indicators
 (page 9-86)
Testing
 (page 9-86)
9.2.3.6 Catalog numbers
Each cmodule is supplied with a 0.2 m (7.8") connecting cable for the cconnection.
c module Catalog No.
ZSI module WLZSIMD
Analog output module WLANLGCUB
Digital output module with relay output WLRLYCUB
Digital output module with relay output, parameterizable WLRLYCCUB
Digital input module WLDGNCUB
ccable (1 m) WLCBUSCABLE1
ccable (0.2 m) WLCBUSCABLE02
9 – 96
9.2.4 External sensor for neutral conductor
(1)
(6)
(2)
(5)
(3)
(4)
(1) Version for copper bar on switchgear side

(2) Mounting bracket
(3) Screw M6 with washers and nut
(4) Version with copper connectors
(5) Connector P2
(6) Connector P1
 Dimension drawings (page 7-18)
Terminal assignment
Remove bridge X8.9 - X8.10
Main conducting path External N sensor

1 3 5 P1
S1 X8.9
S2 X8.10
0377_nu
2 4 6 P2
This arrangement ensures the same direction of the current flow for the circuit breaker and the external neutral sensor.
9 – 97
9.3 External voltage supply
The basic protective functions (L, S, I, & G) of the electronic trip units do not require an auxiliary power supply.
To use the extended functions of trip units ETU745 - 776 requiring data exchange via the c, an external 24 V DC (class 2) voltage
supply must be connected.
Connection
Version A: Connection to secondary terminal block X8 (preferred version)
Version B: Connection to any cmodule
Requirements
The external voltage supply with 24 V DC must fulfill at least the requirements of UL class 2.
The Siemens power supply listed below may be used to supply power to a single circuit breaker. A second circuit breaker requires its own
power supply.
The external power supply used for electronic components must not be used to supply the motor-operated mechanism.
When using voltage supply units from other manufacturers, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
- Primary-switched-mode power supply unit
- 24 V DC, ± 3 %
- Current rating: minimum 3.7A per circuit breaker
- EMC according to: IEC 61000-4-4, 4kV on main side; IEC 61000-4-5, 4kV line-to-earth, 2kV line-to-line.
Catalog number
Power supply Catalog No. MLFB
120/230 VAC / 24 VDC,

WLSITOP1 6EP1332-5BA20
3.8A SITOP PSU100C NEC CLASS 2
9 – 98
9.4 Handheld test device
The handheld test device is used to check that the trip unit, the energy and current transformers, the F5 tripping coil and the measured value
display are functioning properly.
9.4.1 View
s
Test Device for WL Electronic Trip Units
(3) CURRENT TRANSFORMER TEST (1)

L1 L2 L3 N G ETU POWER
START
STATUS
= O.K.
TRIP TEST
(2)
I
0556_nu
Input 110 ... 125 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Cat. No. WLTS, Rev. 0.0 3WL9111-1AT31-0AA0
(1) LED for operating voltage indication

(2) Control buttons
(3) 6 LEDs to show test results
9.4.2 Preparations
- Open and isolate the circuit breaker

- Document the trip unit setting values of the overload release
- Setting value IR = 1.0 In
- Interrupt external voltage supply for the electronic system, if present
- Remove the cap from test connector X25 of the trip unit
NOTICE
9 – 99
9.4.3 Connecting
NOTE
Observe the connecting sequence.
Malfunctions and incorrect test results may result if the sequence is not observed.
3
(1) Test connector of the trip unit
(2) 40-pole ribbon cable with plugs
(3) Voltage supply
(4) Handheld test device
9.4.4 Voltage supply
The handheld test device is supplied by a 110 - 125 V AC network.
9.4.5 Operation
The status test begins after the voltage supply has been connected. The various components and parameters of the trip unit are queried. If
the status test has been completed successfully, the "ETU STATUS" LED will light up continuously.
If it has not been completed successfully, the "ETU STATUS" LED will flash. The type of flashing indicates what type of fault is present.
Indicator Significance
1 x briefly, pause Handheld test device defective
2 x briefly, pause Trip unit defective
- Parameters not set correctly

- Current sensor not properly connected
4 x briefly, pause
- Wrong Rating Plug
- Missing Rating Plug
- Tripping coil F5 not properly connected
5 x briefly, pause
- Coil defective
The status test can be repeated any time by pressing the "START" button for at least three seconds.
It is also possible to test a trip unit that is already activated, i.e. one that is supplied by an external voltage source. However, it must be taken
into account that the "ETU STATUS" LED may briefly flash twice when the status test result is displayed, even if there have not been any
faults. As a precaution, the status test should be repeated without external voltage supply.
9 – 100
Testing the current and energy sensors
To test the current sensors and energy transducers, press the "START" button.
START
A lit-up LED confirms the proper operation of the corresponding sensor/converter. If an LED flashes, the corresponding sensor/converter is
not present, not properly connected, nonconforming, or a transformer without power supply is connected.
Testing the tripping function
To test the tripping function, press one of the buttons "L", "S", "I", "N" or "G".
L S I N G
Long-time delayed tripping Test

The long-time delayed short-circuit tripping function and the trip unit circuitry can be tested using the test device.
1 Charge the circuit breaker

2 Close the circuit breaker
3 Press the [L] button
The circuit breaker will trip after the set long-time delay time, plus approx. 2 seconds processing time, has elapsed. If the test device has
completed a test without faults, the "ETU STATUS" LED will light up continuously green. If a fault is detected, the LED will flash. The type of
flashing indicates what type of fault is present (fault codes are listed on page 9-104).
Short-time delayed tripping Test

The short-time delayed short-circuit tripping function and the trip unit circuitry can be tested using the test device.

3 Press the [S] button
The circuit breaker will trip after the set short-time delay time, plus approx. 2 seconds processing time, has elapsed. If the test device has
Instantaneous tripping test

The instantaneous tripping function and the trip unit circuitry can be tested using the test device.

3 Press the [I] button
The circuit breaker will trip after approx. 2 seconds processing time. If the test device has completed a test without faults, the "ETU STATUS"
LED will light up continuously green. If a fault is detected, the LED will flash. The type of flashing indicates what type of fault is present (fault
codes are listed on page 9-104).
9 – 101
Neutral conductor tripping test
The long-time delayed short-circuit tripping function for the neutral conductor and the trip unit circuitry for ETU type 776 can be tested using
the test device.The current sensor for the neutral conductor must be attached (page 9-97) and the "Neutral conductor protection" function
must be switched on (page 9-13).

3 Press the [N] button
The circuit breaker will trip after the set long-time delay time, plus approx. 2 seconds processing time, has elapsed. If the test device has
Ground-fault tripping test

The ground-fault tripping function and the trip unit circuitry of ETU types 745-746 with an installed ground-fault protection module (with trip-
ping function WLGFM48 or WLGFM76) can be tested using the test device. The current sensor for the neutral conductor (page 9-97) and/or
the iron-core ground-fault sensor (page 9-44) must be attached.

3 Press the [G] button
The circuit breaker will trip after the set ground-fault tripping delay time, plus approx. 2 seconds processing time, has elapsed. If the test
device has completed a test without faults, the "ETU STATUS" LED will light up continuously green. If a fault is detected, the LED will flash.
The type of flashing indicates what type of fault is present (fault codes are listed on page 9-104).
Testing the measured value display
This function works by inputting a signal into the trip unit. The signal is displayed as a single-phase current on the trip unit's display, and the
current's measured value is also transmitted via the communication interface to the connected CublicleBUS modules and the connected
Modbus RTU / PROFIBUS DP networks.
This feature only works with an integrated display (WLETU745 with WLLCD48, WLETU776), and communicates test signals when a 
communication interface and/or a CublicleBUS module is installed on the trip unit.This feature does not work when a MeteringPLUS
(WLMETERP) module is installed.
I + N
1 Connect 24 V DC to power the trip unit.

2 Press the [I] and [N] buttons simultaneously
A single-phase test signal is fed into the trip unit, which simulates a single-phase load current for the ETU. The local display, the connected
communications and connected CublicleBUS modules output this current value. The test signal will specify the simulated value to the first
phase for 30 seconds, before changing to the next phase. The cycle runs in the order L1, L2, L3, N, G. The test cycle is completed when all
phases have been tested.
Activation the trip unit
To activate the trip unit, press the "N" and "G" buttons simultaneously.
N + G
The trip unit will remain activated until another button on the handheld test device (WLTS) is depressed.
With this function, the "T.U.-Error"-LED can be checked if the status test had finished with the error "Trip unit defective".
9 – 102
9.4.6 Finishing
- Restore the documented settings

- Mount the cover on X25
Catalog No.
Handheld test device WLTS
Replacement cables WLTSC
9 – 103
10 Reset the reclosing lockout and the Bell Alarm
10.1 Resetting the Bell Alarm
Circuit breaker is tripped by trip unit
Automatic reset
Automatic
F5 reset of the maglatch
1
Tripping coil
0077-01_u
Signals
Indicators
Trip
S24
Bell Alarm
X9.12 X9.14
2
Circuit breaker is immediately "Ready-to-close" again, 
if closing spring is charged.
X9.13
Reset Bell Alarm
Electrical remote reset Manual reset

Option: Electrical remote reset of reclosing lockout and the 
Bell Alarm via a remote reset coil.  (page 10-5)
X8.13
3
0053-06_u
S24
S13 X9.12 X9.14
Press Bell Alarm (red pin), until it latches
F7
X9.13
X8.14
Reset
S24
Bell Alarm
X9.12 X9.14
Bell Alarm Reset

4
X9.13
Tripped signal reset
10 – 1
10.2 Resetting the Bell Alarm with reclosing lockout (optional)
WL circuit breakers are normally configured to be immediately "Ready-to-close" again following a trip. With the automatic reset of the Bell
Alarm, the tripping coil is automatic resetting after the trip unit has tripped. The circuit breaker is immediately "Ready-to-close" again. For
confirmation, the tripped indicator must be reset, either manually on the trip unit or via the remote reset coil.
When the WL breaker is configured with option WLNOAUTRSET, the tripping coil must be manually reset before the circuit breaker is
capable of closing. The following instruction details the resetting of the Bell Alarm, and the tripping coil.
Circuit breaker is tripped by the trip unit
1
Signals
Indicators Trip
S24
Bell Alarm
X9.12 X9.14
2
X9.13
Manual reset
Press Bell Alarm (red pin), until it latches
Reset
S24
F5 X9.12 X9.14
0077-01_u
X9.13
Bell Alarm reset
Tripping coil Bell Alarm
Tripping coil and Bell Alarm are reset.
Indicators
Circuit breaker is "Ready-to-close" again if the closing spring is charged and no interlock is active.
10 – 2
10.3 Field Installation of a reclosing lockout
To activate the Bell Alarm lockout, the automatic reset must be removed. The tripping coil, the tripped indicator and the tripped signal must
be reset manually at the breaker. Reclosing of the circuit breaker is blocked until the trip indicator has been reset.
DANGER
WARNING
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring  (page 23-2).
- Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle  (page 23-3).
- Remove front panel  (page 23-4).
- Remove the trip unit  (page 9-49).
10 – 3
10.3.1 Removing the automatic reset mechanism
1
3
0565-3
2
1 Remove lock washer

2 Remove bolt
3 Remove reset spring
Then
- Install trip unit  (page 9-49)
- Install front panel  (page 23-4)
10 – 4
10.4 Installing the remote Bell Alarm reset
NOTICE
Can only be used with automatic reclosing lockout reset.
The remote reset coil will otherwise be overloaded and damaged.
10.4.1 Mounting remote reset coil and cut-off switch
DANGER
WARNING
- OPEN the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring  (page 23-2).
- Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle  (page 23-3).
- Remove the trip unit  (page 9-49).
10 – 5
Mounting electrical remote reset coil F7
NOTICE
When routing the wires, care must be taken to ensure that wires are not damaged when reinstalling the ETU carriage.
0191-2
-1
91
01
PZ 1 3
0191-3
10.4.2 Connecting wires
 (page 8-1)
Terminals
X8.13
X8.14
3,0 x 0,6
1/8“
10 – 6
10.4.3 Function test
1 2 3
X8.13
0053-06_u
S24
S13 X9.12 X9.14
F7 S24 S24
X9.12 X9.14 X9.12 X9.14
S24 X8.14
X9.13
X9.13 X9.13
Then
10.4.4 Updating the options label
NOTE
After installing additional electrical components, add the following data and mark with a "x", using an indelible ink pen.
X9-12 X9-14
Siemens Industry, Inc., Fort Worth, TX 76155 USA Assembled in USA 240 VAC , 10 A / 125 VDC , 0.5 A / 24 VDC , 3A X9-13
0131-FW
Voltage Catalog No.
24 V DC WLRSET24
48 V DC WLRSET48
Electric Bell Alarm reset coil
110 - 125 V AC / DC WLRSET120
208 - 250 V AC / DC WLRSET240
10 – 7
11 Shunt Trip / Closing Coil / Undervoltage release
11.1 Overview
Mounting locations
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(6)
(7)
(1) 1st shunt trip F1

(2) Signaling switch S22
(3) Closing coil CC
(4) 2nd shunt trip F2
or undervoltage release (instantaneous) F3
or undervoltage release (time-delayed) F4
(5) Signaling switch S23 or S43
(6) Cut-off switch S14 for shunt trip 5% duty cycle
(7) Cut-off switch S15 for closing coil CC 5% duty cycle
11 – 1
11.2 Installing shunt trips, closing coils, and undervoltage devices
DANGER
WARNING
- Move the circuit breaker into the withdrawn position in the cradle  (page 23-3)
1
2
Retaining bracket 4 Replace retaining bracket and screw down.
11 – 2
11.3 Installing optional signaling switches on shunt trips, closing coils, and undervoltage devices
Signals the the operating status of the shunt trip, closing coil, or undervoltage device to the BSS.
A B
(1)
(2)
(3) 2
(4) 1
(5)
A Snap in place
B Disassembly
(1) Rocker
(2) Signaling switch
(3) Guide
(4) Groove
(5) Snap-fit
1 Disengage the snap-fit

2 Pull out the signaling switch
11.4 Setting delay times on undervoltage release
Instantaneous release
short-time delayed: td q 200 milliseconds
J1
instantaneous: td q 80 milliseconds
11 – 3
Time-delayed release
3 x 0,5
Delay time td: 1/8“
td = (0.2 ... 1.6 sec.) + 1.6 sec.
S1
td = 0.2 ... 1.6 sec.
11.5 Field Installation of a cut-off switch for shunt trips and closing coils
S14
S15
pre-wired
S15 a b a S14
0136-07_nu
F1 CC F2
11 – 4
A B
A Shunt trip with cut-off switch S14

B Closing coil with cut-off switch S15
C Combination of shunt trip and closing coil with combined cut-off switch S14/S15
11 – 5
11.6 Mechanical function test
WARNING
Shunt trip Closing coil
1  Charge the closing spring manually (page 6-4)
2  Close circuit breaker (page 6-7)
Armature Armature
CC
0169-02_u
4
0083_u
0083_u
Circuit breaker opens Circuit breaker closes
5  Opening the circuit breaker (page 6-7)
11.7 Connecting wires
Terminals
CC : X6.7 / X6.8
F1 : X6.13 / X6.14
F2, F3 : X5.11 / X5.12
F4 : X5.11 ... X5.14
3,0 x 0,6
S10 : X9.9 / X6.7
1/8“
11 – 6
11.8 Final tasks

- Attach secondary disconnect blocks  (page 5-15)
- Connect wires to secondary disconnect block (page 5-14)
- Move the draw-out circuit breaker into the test position  (page 6-2)
- Ensure control voltage is connected
11.9 Electrical function test
NOTE
Make sure that the closing coil with 5% operating time is only activated when the circuit breaker is ready for closing.
Otherwise the closing coil will be damaged.
Closing coil Undervoltage release
1  Charge the closing spring (page 6-4)
CC
0169-05_u
Actuate the closing coil
Electrical Closed Remote activation
3
Remove control power to test undervoltage release.
4
0083_u
Circuit breaker closes
11 – 7
Shunt trip Undervoltage release
 Charge the closing spring (page 6-4)

1
 Closing the circuit breaker (page 6-7)
Actuate shunt trip
Remote activation
3 Remove control power to test undervoltage release.
4 Circuit breaker opens

0083_u
11 – 8
11.10 Updating the options label
NOTE
After installing additional electrical components, mark with a "x", using an indelible ink pen. 
The voltage must also be noted in the box.
X9-12 X9-14
0131-FW
Closing coil VAC 50/60 Hz VDC Catalog No.
— 24 WLRCS24
— 48 WLRCS48
Closing coil
110-127 110-125 WLRCS120
208-240 220-250 WLRCS240
Signaling switches Catalog No.
Signaling switch for 1st shunt trip WLSTC
Signaling switch for 2nd shunt trip or undervoltage release WLUVRC
1st Shunt Trip VAC 50/60 Hz VDC Catalog No.
— 24 WLST24
— 48 WLST48
Shunt trip F1
110-127 110-125 WLST120
208-240 220-250 WLST240
2nd Shunt Trip or UVR VAC 50/60 Hz VDC Catalog No.
— 24 WLST24
— 48 WLST48
Shunt trip F2
110-127 110-125 WLST120
208-240 220-250 WLST240
— 24 WLUV24
— 48 WLUV48
Undervoltage release F3 (instantaneous)
110-127 110-125 WLUV120
208-240 220-250 WLUV240
— 48 WLUVD48
Undervoltage release F4 (time-delayed) 110-127 110-125 WLUVD120
208-240 220-250 WLUVD240
11 – 9
12 Auxiliary and control switches
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(1) Bell Alarm S24

(2) Cut off switch for remote reset coil S13  (page 10-5)
(3) Signaling switch blown fuse S26
(4) Signaling switch S22 for 1st shunt trip  (page 11-3)
(5) Signaling switch for "Ready-to-close" S20
(6) Signaling switch S23 for 2nd shunt trip or under-voltage release  (page 11-3)
(7) Contact position-driven auxiliary switch S1
12 – 1
12.1 Installing internal auxiliary switches S1 - S4
DANGER
WARNING
S1
S2
S3 S4
The connecting wires from the auxiliary switches must be connected to terminals X5 and X6 according to the wiring plan (page 8-2).
Contact position-driven auxiliary switches Catalog No.
S1 + S2
WLAS2
(2 "a" + 2 "b" contacts)
S1 + S2 + S3 + S4
WLAS4
(4 "a" + 4 "b" contacts)
12 – 2
12.2 Installing the "Ready-to-close" switch S20
DANGER
WARNING
Snap-in mounting
S20
The connecting wires from the "Ready-to-close" signaling switch must be connected to terminal X6 according to the wiring plan (page 8-3).
"Ready-to-close" signaling switch S20 WLRTCS
12 – 3
12.3 Trip Signaling Switches
DANGER
WARNING
- Remove trip unit  (page 9-49)
12 – 4
12.3.1 Trip Signaling Switches S13, S24, and S26
NOTICE
Over-tightening the mounting screws may deform the signaling switch and could lead to an incorrect indication 
of breaker status.
Hardware shall be tightened carefully until the underside of the screw head is flush with the mounting surface.
(3)
(2)
(1) (4) PZ 1
hand tighten
(1) S26 assembled with snap-in pins

(2) S13 snap in assembly
(3) S25 / S45 assembled with self-tapping screws
(4) S24 assembled with snap-in pins
The connecting wires from the signaling switches must be connected to secondary disconnects X8 and X9 according to the 
wiring plan (page 8-3) and (page 8-6).
Bell Alarm S24 (1 form C contact) WLBA
12 – 5
12.4 Control switches - Connecting wires
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(1) Cut-off switch S13 for remote reset

(2) Cut-off switch S14 for shunt trip F1  (page 11-4)
(3) Cut-off switch S15 for closing coil CC  (page 11-4)
(4) Motor disconnecting switch S12  (page 13-3)
12.5 Communication switches
 Signaling switches for BSS (page 9-55)
12.6 Connecting secondary wiring
3,0 x 0,6
NOTE
After installing additional components, mark the following data with a "x", using an indelible ink pen.
X9-12 X9-14
0131-FW
12 – 6
12.8 Mechanism Operated Contacts (MOC)
The circuit breaker may be equipped with an external auxiliary switch assembly. These external auxiliary switches are known as 
Mechanism Operated Contacts. In short, the assembly is also referred to as the MOC.
The MOC assembly is mounted within the circuit breaker compartment (cradle) and is connected to the main breaker-driveshaft 
via a coupler, which is added to the circuit breaker during the MOC installation.
The circuit breaker, itself, may be optionally ordered with either no internal auxiliary switches, a set of four internal auxiliary 
switches (2 a + 2 b contacts), or eight internal auxiliary switches (4 a + 4 b contacts).
With the addition of a MOC device, an additional eight auxiliary switches (4 a + 4 b contacts) may be added to a circuit breaker.
Note referencing ANSI C37.100:
“a” contact: A secondary contact that is open when the circuit breaker is open, and closed when the circuit breaker is closed
“b” contact: A secondary contact that is closed when the circuit breaker is open, and open when the circuit breaker is closed
(1)
Cradle
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Attention: Four contact
b a b a b a b a blocks must be installed
for proper operation
2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
S53 S52 S51 S50

blocks must be installed
(1) (2) (5) (3) (4)
(1) MOC
(2) 4 signaling switches
(3) Driver for connected position
(4) Driver for test position
(5) Warning label
12 – 7
12.8.1 MOC Versions
The MOC device may be ordered in two versions for drawout circuit breakers:
The auxiliary contacts, in the “Connect Only” version of the MOC, only change state when the circuit breaker is opened/closed while it 
is in the “CONNECTED” position within the circuit breaker compartment. There are two distinct models of the “Connect Only” MOC, one 
for circuit breaker frame size 2 (WLMOCC) and a second for circuit breaker frame size 3 (WLMOCC3).
The second version is known as the “Test and Connect” version. In the “Test and Connect” version, the auxiliary contacts change state 
when the circuit breaker is opened/closed while it is in the “TEST” or “CONNECTED” positions within the circuit breaker compartment. 
Like the “Connect Only” version, there are two distinct models of the “connect only” MOC, one for circuit breaker frame size 2 (WLMOC) 
and a second for circuit breaker frame size 3 (WLMOC3).
12.8.2 MOC Installation Instructions
There are two MOC versions available: with and without a driver for the test position. The version with only one drive is generally used for
fixed-mounted circuit breakers.
DANGER
- Remove circuit breaker from cradle  (page 23-3)
12.8.2.1 Installing the coupler
In order to interface the MOC assembly (mounted in the circuit breaker compartment), the circuit breaker must be outfitted with a 
coupler (see Figure 1).
Figure 1
In order to install the coupler, the clear plastic plug in the sidewall of the circuit breaker (see Figure 2) must first be removed. 
Facing the breaker, the plug is on right sidewall. This is easily accomplished by levering with a small screwdriver.
Figure 2
12 – 8
The coupler snaps onto the end of the steel mainshaft. The steel band should not be removed when installing the coupler. Also ensure 
that the coupler is oriented properly when installed. Figure 3 illustrates the proper installed orientation of a shaft extension (circuit breaker
shown in the OPEN position), with the tampered flange facing the rear of the circuit breaker..
Figure 3
0421-1_nu
NOTE
The tapered flange of the coupler must point towards the rear side of the circuit breaker.
12 – 9
12.8.2.2 Installing the MOC Baseplate Assembly
The MOC baseplate assembly is secured to the circuit breaker compartment (cradle) by two tabs in the rear and two screws in the front.
With the screws inserted from the inside of the cubicle, and the nuts and lockwashers on the outside, the nuts must be torqued to 
71 lbin (8 Nm).
2
3
12 – 10
12.8.2.3 Removing the Contact Blocks
NOTICE
MOC Reliability
May cause intermittent signaling.
All four contact blocks, whether wired or not, must be installed into the MOC assembly to ensure reliable operation.
The contact blocks must be removed in order to access the terminals for wiring. The contact blocks should be removed by applying a small
amount of outward pressure with a thin blade screwdriver, in the area shown in Figure 6.
Figure 6
NOTICE
Contact block damage.
May cause loss of signaling.
Do not over-extend the feet of the contact block when reinstalling into the MOC assembly.
12 – 11
12.8.2.4 Wiring the Contact Blocks
The contact blocks are designated (front of cradle to rear of cradle) S50, S51, S52, and S53. Each contact block contains one “a” and one
“b” contact, with the terminal designations as shown below. Each terminal accepts a maximum of one wire, 14 AWG (or smaller), and shall
be tightened to 7 lbin (0.8 Nm).
7 mm
1/4“

blocks must be installed 3,0 x 0,6
1/8“
S53 S52 S51 S50

0,8 Nm
7 lb-in

blocks must be installed
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
b a b a b a b a
2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
12.8.2.5 Installing the Contact Blocks
NOTICE
MOC Reliability
May cause intermittent signaling.
All four contact blocks, whether wired or not, must be installed into the MOC assembly to ensure reliable operation.
The contact blocks must be firmly seated, with the feet of the contact block latched into the MOC assembly housing. If there is damage to
the contact block assembly, a replacement contact block must be used. Replacement contact blocks may be purchased per catalog number
WLMOCSWK (includes four replacement contact block assemblies).
NOTICE
Contact block damage.
May cause loss of signaling.
Do not over-extend the feet of the contact block when reinstalling into the MOC assembly.
12 – 12
12.8.2.6 Contact Ratings
Maximum Current
Voltage
Continuous Making Breaking
120 VAC 10 A 30 A 3A
240 VAC 10 A 30 A 3A
24 VDC 5A 1.1 A 1.1 A
48 VDC 5A 1.1 A 1.1 A
125 VDC 5A 1.1 A 1.1 A
250 VDC 5A 0.55 A 0.55 A
12.8.3 Order numbers
MOC Catalog No.
Mechanism Operated Auxiliary Contacts, cradle-mounted, 4 NO + 4 NC, 

WLMOC
Test and connected position, for draw-out circuit breaker only, FS II

WLMOCC
Connected position only, for draw-out circuit breaker only, FS II

WLMOC3
Test and connected position, for draw-out circuit breaker only, FS III

WLMOCC3
Connected position only, for draw-out circuit breaker only, FS III
12 – 13
12.8.4 Combination of MOC and
mechanical interlocking module
For the MOC to be combined and operated with the mutual mechanical interlocking module, a special clutch shaft must be used in place 
of the normal one.
wrench size
Longer side turned upwards 13mm
(2) 12 Nm
105 lb-in
(1)
(1) Clutch shaft

(2) Lock-nut
12.8.5 Mounting of MOC and mechanical interlocking module on the cradle
Size
5
8 Nm
71 lb-in
MOC
Side wall
Mechanical interlocking module
12 – 14
13 Motor-operated mechanism
For charging the closing spring automatically. 

It is switched on if the closing spring is discharged and control voltage is applied. 
The motor-operated mechanism is automatically switched off after the closing spring has been fully charged.
13.1 Installing the motor operator
DANGER
WARNING
13 – 1
Mounting the motor on the operating shaft
1
Operating shaft of the manual operating mechanism 2
Fixing the motor-operated mechanism & connecting wires
2 3
X5
3,0 x 0,6
Size
5 Terminals
X5.1 (-)
X5.2 (+)
6 Nm 1
53 lb-in
13 – 2
13.2 Optional motor disconnect switch on the front panel
Option.
For switching off the motor-operated mechanism control voltage. Supplied pre-assembled with one wire to be soldered .
Installing motor disconnect switch
S 12
Solder point
2
Rocker
Connecting motor disconnect switch
- Disconnect the brown wire from the motor-operated mechanism from terminal X5.2.
- Connect wire X5-2 of the disconnect switch S12 to terminal X5.2.
- Solder the brown wire from the motor-operated mechanism to terminal 4 of the disconnect switch S12.
13 – 3
Installing the selector knob
Rubber seal
1
Note: An additional spacer
3,0 x 0,6 ring is provided. It is installed
4 between the knob and the
front panel.
hand tighten 2
- Factory installed accessory only. Available as replacement kit

NOTE
After installing additional components, mark the following data with a "x", using an indelible ink pen.
X9-12 X9-14
0131-FW
Voltage Power consumption Catalog No.
24 V DC / 30 V DC 110 W WLELCMTR24
48 V DC / 60 V DC 120 W WLELCMTR48
Motor-operated mechanism
110-127 V AC / 110-125 V DC 150 W WLELCMTR120
208-240 V AC / 220-250 V DC 130 W WLELCMTR240
24 V DC / 30 V DC 110 W WLELCMTR24S
48 V DC / 60 V DC 120 W WLELCMTR48S
with motor disconnect switch 110-127 V AC / 110-125 V DC 150 W WLELCMTR120S
208-240 V AC / 220-250 V DC 130 W WLELCMTR240S
13 – 4
14 Indicators and operating elements
There are additional indicators and operating elements available for field installation.
14.1 Limiting Access to OPEN/CLOSE Buttons
This accessory kit allows the access to the OPEN and CLOSE buttons of the circuit breaker to be limited in any combination of the supplied
components.
DANGER
WARNING
14 – 1
Supplied Components:
(1) 2x access blocks. Button is only accessible with a 1/8" pin (or smaller)  (page 17-2)
(2) 2x sealing caps for sealing or attaching a padlock to block the button  (page 15-22)
(3) Shield to prevent inadvertent operation
(4) Mounting plate
NOTICE
Damage to accessory.
Over-tightening the mounting screws may strip the plastic frame, or damage components, rendering the accessory unusable.
3
OPEN
PZ 1
hand tighten
2
1
CLOSE
Catalog No.
Catalog No.
Locking set WLLKKT
14 – 2
14.2 EMERGENCY OPEN button
This accessory kit allows the installation of an EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton above the OPEN button. When depressed, the
breaker is opened, and the breaker is held in a trip-free condition until the EMERGENCY STOP mushroom pushbutton is released.
NOTICE
Mechanical OFF
4 PZ 1
3 2
NOTE
Install the EMERGENCY OFF mushroom pushbutton as shown (arrow on the right side).
Catalog No.
Catalog No.
EMERGENCY OFF mushroom pushbutton WLEPEN
14 – 3
14.3 Operations counter
The operations counter is incremented when the circuit breaker completes the charging cycle (manual or electrically operated).
The mechanical operations counter can be installed only if the circuit breaker is equipped with a motor-operated mechanism.
PZ 1
Knocking out the fields on the front panel
knock out
Front panel
deburr
Use a suitable base.
Catalog No.
Catalog No.
Mechanical operations counter WLNUMCNT
14 – 4
15 Locking devices
15.1 Key Locks
 Padlocking provisions (page 15-16)
(1)
(4)
(3)
(2)
Key lock Manufacturer Application

To activate the locking device, the circuit breaker must be opened. If the circuit breaker is closed, the
Breaker-mounted KIRK locking device is blocked. The block is only effective when the key is removed. The key can only be
1
key lock SUPERIOR removed in "OPEN" position.
 (page 15-2)
Cradle-mounted This cradle-mounted key lock prevents the closing of any circuit breaker installed in the cell which this
key lock lock is installed. Up to two independent Kirk or Superior key locks may be installed.
KIRK
2 To activate the lock, the circuit breaker must be open. If the circuit breaker is closed, the locking device
SUPERIOR
is blocked. The block is only effective if the key is withdrawn. The key can only be removed in the
"OPEN" position.  (page 15-4)
Racking handle KIRK Prevents drawing out of the racking handle. The circuit breaker is protected from being moved. The
3
key lock SUPERIOR block is only effective when the key is removed.  (page 15-11)
Bell Alarm and open A lockable cover prevents resetting the Bell Alarm or open fuse lockout after the breaker trips.
4
fuse lockout key lock  (page 15-15)
15 – 1
15.1.1 Breaker mounted key lock
DANGER
WARNING
When the key is removed, the circuit breaker is locked in the open position.
- Remove trip unit  (page 9-49)
Installing the locking mechanism
For key lock types: KIRK, Superior
(1) 2
NOTE
When removing the screws (1), ensure that the cylinder does not slip out of the lock. If this happens, the lock cannot be re-assembled.
15 – 2
knock out
deburr
Front panel
Use a suitable base
3,0 x 0,6 5
2 Nm 3
18 lb-in 4
Then
Key lock Manufacturer Catalog No.
KIRK WLLKOFFKRK
Breaker mounted key lock
SUPERIOR WLLKOFFSUP
15 – 3
15.1.2 Cradle mounted key lock
DANGER
When a key is removed, all circuit breakers racked into this cradle will be locked in the open position.
0636_nu
15 – 4
Components of the key locking device
FS II and FS III 3-pole

16
1
15
14
2
17
13
3
12
11
4
10
5
9 8 7 6
(1) Countersunk head screw M6 with belleville washer and nut (13) Small attachment angle
(2) M4 socket head cap screw (must not be used in FS II, fused) (14) 2x M4 socket-head cap screws
(3) Pre-assembled skid with guide (15) Spacer (for FS II only)
(4) Lever (16) Plastic slider (slotted)
(5) Spacer FS II / III: short slot
(6) Kirk key, supplied separately including fixing screws FS II fused: long slot
(7) Bolt with washer size 5 mm and clip (for 4 mm inner diameter (17) 2x spring lock washers
groove; (for 4 mm groove; for FS II only) (18) Mounting plate
(8) 3x M4 socket-head cap screws with lock waschers and nuts (for (19) Pre-assembled lever mechanism
FS III only) (20) Attachment angle low
(9) Extension (for FS III only) (21) 2X Thread-forming screws M4x8 and washers
(10) Bolt with washer size 5 mm and clip (for 4 mm inner diameter (22) Bolt (long) with washers size 5 and 6 mm and clip size 4mm
groove; (for 4 mm groove; for FS II only) (23) Bolt (short) with washers size 5 and 6 mm and clip size 4mm
(11) Ramp extension (for FS III only) (24) 2X Clip for 4mm inner diameter groove
(12) 2x M4 flat-head screw (for FS III only) (25)
22 FS III 4-pole
1
20
14, 17
24
18 21 19
15 – 5
Installing the locks
The way in which the locking module unit is installed is the same whether the unit consists of one lock or two locks. Do not use the spacer
which may be provided with the key lock. The spacer (5) supplied with the mounting must be used in place of the spacers supplied with the
lock.
NOTE
Attach the lever (4) to the KIRK / Superior locks (6) with the screws supplied with the lock.
Attach the KIRK / Superior locks (6) together with the spacer (5) to the lock mechanism using the supplied screws.
0709-1
NOTE
Omit Step 2 for FS II fused circuit breakers
For FS II 4-pole and FS III 3-pole only:
15 – 6
Mounting the skid with guide to the base plate of the cradle
PZ 2
1
3,2 Nm
28 lb-in
(1)
(1) Base plate of the cradle
Mounting the guide on the guide rail
A
(5)
(4)
PZ 2
B
3
3,2 Nm
28 lb-in 2
0711_nu
2 1
0713_nu
(1) (2) (3)
(1)
1 PZ 2
12 Nm
106 lb-in
A Frame size II
B Frame size III and Frame size II 4-pole
(1) Guide rail on left side

(2) Spacer for FS II must be mounted between angle and guide rail
(3) Attachment angle
(4) Guide for FS II
(5) Guide for ANSI FS II fused
Step 3: For FS II fused insert the bolt in to the hole for the long slot.
15 – 7
Frame size III 4-pole
3,2 Nm 1
28 lb-in
4
3,2 Nm
3
28 lb-in
2 12 Nm
106 lb-in
Step 1. Mounting the plate with lever mechanism to the base plate of the cradle
Step 2. Mounting the guide to the attachment angle
Step 3. Mounting the attachment angle to the guide rail
Step 4. To connect the lever with the short slot of guide use the long bolt
Step 5. To connect the lever with the skid, use the short bolt
15 – 8
Drilling the hole in the cubicle door
(1)
(2)
(5) (4) (3)
(1) Lower edge of door cutout

(2) Center of front panel
(3) Mounting surface of cradle
(4) Hole for first key cylinder
(5) Hole for second key cylinder (only if planned)
1 Knock out the fields on the front panel using a suitable base
2 Deburr the edges
Then:
Function test
- Check that the locking mechanism on the locks can rotate freely when the keys are turned.
- Check that the spring turns the locking mechanism back to the starting position when it is unlocked.
- By repeatedly drawing out and re-inserting the left guide rail, check that the carriage is also actuated and can move freely.
15 – 9
Catalog Numbers
Lock & Key for Cradle Mounting Manufacturer Catalog No.
Kirk WLDLKRK
Single lock
Superior WLDSUP
Kirk WLDLDKRK
Double lock
Superior WLDLDSUP
Provision-only for Cradle Lock Catalog No.
Single Lock Provision WLDLPR
Double Lock Provision WLDLDPR
Lock & Key for Cradle Mounting FSII 4-pole Manufacturer Catalog No.
Kirk WL4DLKRK2
Single lock
Superior WL4DLSUP2
Kirk WL4DLDKRK2
Double lock
Superior WL4DLDSUP2
Provision-only for Cradle Lock FSII 4-pole Catalog No.
Lock Provision WL4DLPR2
Lock & Key for Cradle Mounting FSIII 4-pole Manufacturer Catalog No.
Kirk WL4DLKRK3
Single lock
Superior WL4DLSUP3
Kirk WL4DLDKRK3
Double lock
Superior WL4DLDSUP3
Provision-only for Cradle Lock FSIII 4-pole Catalog No.
Lock Provision WL4DLPR3
15 – 10
15.1.3 Installing racking handle key lock
When the key is removed, the circuit breaker's racking handle cannot be drawn out, meaning that the circuit breaker cannot be moved into
another position.
The key lock for the WL Fuse Carriage racking handle cannot be replaced. If damaged, please consult Technical Support.
DANGER
WARNING
15 – 11
Pre-assembling the locking module
0767

Installing
15 – 12
Size
4
5 Nm
45 lb-in
8 7
(1) Socket head cap screw M5 with washer and nut
15 – 13
Knocking out the field on the front panel
1
2
0044-08
1 Knock out the fields on the front panel using a suitable base
2 Deburr the edges
Then:
KIRK WLLKCLKRK
Circuit-breaker racking handle key lock
SUPERIOR WLLKCLSUP
15 – 14
15.1.4 Installing a Bell Alarm cover key lock
When the key is removed, the cover cannot be removed and the Bell Alarm cannot be reset.
1
Knock out
Push outwards, not inward.
3 (1)
2 (1)
(2)
(1) Cover with safety lock

(2) Trip unit
Locking
2
Withdraw key
Bell Alarm and open fuse lockout key lock WLTUSC55
15 – 15
15.2 Padlocking provisions
 Key Locks (page 15-1)

(1)
(7) (2)
(6)
(3)
(5)
(4)
Padlock locking device Application
Padlock locking bracket The locking bracket for "OPEN" can be locked with up to 4 padlocks 1/4” diameter. The circuit breaker cannot 
1
for "OPEN" be closed.
2 Shutter If the circuit breaker has been removed, the shutter can be locked with padlocks.  (page 15-19)
The guide rails can be locked with 2 padlocks so that they cannot be drawn out. The circuit breaker is either in 
3 Guide rails the connected position or has been removed. It is not possible to insert a circuit breaker into the cradle.
 (page 15-20)
Up to 3 padlocks can be used to prevent the racking handle being drawn out. The circuit breaker is then locked
4 Racking handle
against being moved.  (page 15-20)
The spring charging lever can be locked with a padlock. This prevents manual charging of the closing spring.
5 Spring charging lever
 (page 15-20)
Actuation of the CLOSE button can be prevented by locking the sealing cap with up to 3 padlocks. CLOSING via
6 CLOSE
the "electrical CLOSE" button and remote closing remain possible.  (page 15-22)
Actuation of the OPEN button can be prevented by locking the sealing cap with up to 3 padlocks. Remote closing
7 OPEN button
remains possible.
15 – 16
15.2.1 Padlock locking the breaker OPEN
This padlock provision is a standard feature. When the control gate is raised (step 1), the padlock provision can be extended, and padlocks
installed. With padlocks installed, this circuit breaker cannot be closed. This provision will support up to four 1/4" diameter padlocks at one
time.
Locking with a padlock
2 3
Field installation
DANGER
WARNING
- Install the control gate if not already present.
15 – 17
Mounting padlock locking bracket
Latching plate in control gate
Then:
Padlock locking device Catalog No.
Padlock locking breaker/OPEN WLLKNP
15 – 18
15.2.2 Optional: Intalling padlocks
The WL shutter prevents incidental contact with primary conductors when the circuit breaker is removed from the cradle. At the user’s
option, padlocks may be installed through the arms of the shutter assembly, as a means of locking out direct access to the primary conduc-
tors. One padlock through each arm is required to lock out primary conductor direct access..
NOTICE
Remove padlocks before inserting breaker into the cradle.
Frame size 2 shown
15 – 19
15.2.3 Padlock Locking device for guide rails
The cradle is equipped with this locking device as standard. Up to two padlocks can be applied on each side. This prevents a circuit breaker
from being inserted into an empty cradle.
; 5/16“ / 8 mm
15.2.4 Padlock Locking device for racking handle
Draw-out circuit breakers are equipped with this locking device as standard. Up to three padlocks can be applied to prevent the circuit
breaker from being racked into another position.
max. ; 8 mm
5/16“
1
3
2
15.2.5 Padlock Locking device for spring charging lever
1
max. ; 8 mm
5/16“
This locking device is an optional accessory for preventing manual charging of the circuit breaker closing spring mechanism. It does not pre-
vent charging via the motor-operated mechanism.
15 – 20
Field installation
DANGER
WARNING
- Open the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring  (page 23-2)
Knock out 2
1
Then:
Padlock Locking device Catalog No.
Locking device for spring charging lever WLHANDLC
15 – 21
15.2.6 CLOSE/OPEN padlock kit
The manual closing and/or opening of this circuit breaker can be prevented, when this optional accessory is installed. The covers for the
CLOSE button and the OPEN button can be fitted with up to three padlocks. With padlocks applied, it is still possible to electrically open and
close this circuit breaker.
15 – 22
Field installation of sealing cover
DANGER
WARNING
See also  Limiting Access to OPEN/CLOSE Buttons (page 14-1)
NOTICE
3
OPEN
2
PZ 1
1
hand tighten
CLOSE
Then:
Padlock Locking device Catalog No.
CLOSE/OPEN Padlock Kit WLLKKT
15 – 23
16 Sealing covers
(1) Sealing cover for CLOSE button

(2) Sealing cover for ETU (electronic trip unit)
(3) Sealing cover for OPEN button
Sealing cover for CLOSE/OPEN buttons
 Field installation of sealing cover (page 15-23)
Sealing cover for ETU (electronic trip unit)
 Sealing and locking device (page 9-53)
16 – 1
17 Mechanical interlocks
(1)
0064-06-04_nu
(2)
(3)
Mechanical interlock Application
Access block via CLOSE/OPEN button  The CLOSE/OPEN buttons are each covered in such a way that operation is only possible
1
(locking set) with a tool.  (page 17-2)
Cubicle door locking mechanism The cubicle door cannot be opened

2
- if the circuit breaker is in the CONNECTED position.  (page 17-3)
Interlock against racking when The racking handle cannot be withdrawn if the cubicle door is open.
3
cubicle door is open
17 – 1
17.1 Field installation of CLOSE / OPEN buttons blocking device
This interlock limits access to the circuit breaker's manual CLOSE and/or OPEN buttons. The blocking device only allows access to the
manual CLOSE and/or OPEN buttons via a small tool (1/8" diameter rod).
DANGER
WARNING
NOTICE
3
OPEN
: 0.25“ (6,35 mm)
2
PZ 1
1
hand tighten CLOSE
Then:
- Fit front panel  (page 23-4)
Mechanical interlock Order No.
Access block via CLOSE button (locking set) WLLKKT
17 – 2
17.2 Cubicle door interlock
This interlock prevents the cubicle door being opened if the circuit breaker is in the CONNECT position.
DANGER
WARNING
17 – 3
17.2.1 Installing the interlock mechanism to the cradle
1 Engage tension spring
5 Engage tension spring

4
3 press + hold
Then:
- Insert the draw-out circuit breaker into the cradle and push it into the disconnected position  (page 6-1)
17.2.2 Cubicle door interlock drill pattern
(1) Centerline of breaker front panel

(2) Door cutout for breaker front panel
(3) Inner side of cubicle door
(4) Hole for manual defeat Ø 7/32 inches
(5) Hole for manual defeat Ø 7/32 inches
Drill this hole only if a manual defeat is required.
(6) Mounting surface
17 – 4
17.2.3 Installing catch on the cubicle door
(1) Clip with hole for manual defeat

(2) Inner side of cubicle door
(3) Catch
(4) 2 washers ISO7089 - 5
(5) 2 hex nuts M5
17.2.4 Function check
- Rack the circuit breaker into the connected position

- Close the cubicle door
Checking the manual defeat function:
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Lock position with circuit breaker closed

(2) Device in normal position
(3) Device in bypassed position
Interlock Order No.

Door locking mechanism for cradle WLDRLC
17 – 5
17.3 Interlock to prevent racking with cubicle door open
DANGER
- Open and discharge the closing spring  (page 23-2)

- Remove the circuit breaker from the cradle  (page 23-3)
Installing the mechanical interlock
1 Engage spring
4 Engage spring
Base plate of cradle 3

5 check
17 – 6
Function check
- Insert the circuit breaker into the cradle and push it into the disconnected position  (page 6-1)
- It must not be possible to draw out the racking handle
Mechanical interlock Order No.

Locking device against moving the circuit breaker if
WLDRLC5UL
the cubicle door is open
17.4 Coding between circuit breaker and cradle
Draw-out circuit breakers and cradles are equiped with a factory coding.
This coding ensures that only circuit breakers can be inserted whose blade contacts match the contacts of the cradle and whose instanta-
neous interrupting capacity and rated current correspond to those of the cradle.
17 – 7
18 Additional options for the cradle
18.1 Shutter
The shutter is closed when the draw-out circuit breaker is in disconnect position or outside the cradle.
The shutter can be fixed in a closed position and protected against unauthorized opening by means of padlocks.  (page 15-19)
18 – 1
18.1.1 Field installation
DANGER
Install Shutter Mounts

Shutter mounting assemblies are used to support the shutter assembly. There are four shutter mounts per shutter (as noted by the 
arrows below).
2 2
2 2
Place each shutter mounting assembly into the cradle locking holes – first by inserting the rear tines (1A) and then rotating the assembly
towards the cradle sidewall (1B). Ensure that the locating dowel pins are seated. The front tines will pass through the rectangular opening in
the cradle sidewall.
1A
1B
18 – 2
Use the screwdriver blade to spread the front tines by inserting the screwdriver between the tines, and rotating the blade in clockwise and
counter-clockwise motions. This will lock the shutter mounts to the cradle.
1C
OK Not OK
18 – 3
Install Shutter to Mounts
The shutter assembly (Item 1) is secured to the shutter mounting assemblies (Item 2) with four M6 x 10mm patch screws (Item 3) as 
shown below.
Torque each screw to 30 lb-in (four places).
Frame size 2 shown
3 1 3
3 3
No. of Poles Frame size Interrupting class Catalog No.
N, S, H, L WLG3SHUT2L
II
F WLG3SHUT2F
3 H, L, F WLG3SHUT3L
III M WLG3SHUT3M
Fuse Carriage WLG3SHUT3FC
II S, H, L WLG4SHUT2L
4
III H, L WLG4SHUT3L
18 – 4
18.2 Truck Operated Contacts - TOC (Cradle Accessory)
DANGER
Truck-operated contacts (TOC) can be installed in the cradle. These enable the signaling of the horizontal position of the breaker in 
the cradle.
(1)
(1) TOC signaling switch module
Three versions are available (Order numbers  (page 18-7).

WLGSGSW111 (Version 1):
- One form C contact for DISCONNECT position (S30)
- One form C contact for TEST position (S31)
- One form C contact for CONNECT position (S34)
- One form C contact for DISCONNECT position (S30)
- Two form C contacts for TEST position (S31 and S32)
- Three form C contacts for CONNECT position (S33, S34, and S35)
- Six form C contacts for CONNECT position (S30, S31, S32, S33, S34, and S35)
Terminals
The TOC accessory is equipped with an integrated terminal block. The integrated terminal block is of spring clamp design, and will accept
1xAWG 20 – 1xAWG 14 for each point
18 – 5
Circuit breaker postion and TOC contact state
Circuit breaker position

Switch Terminal
Designation Points
Disconnect position Test position Connected position
2
S30 1
4
2
S31 / S32 1
4
2
S33 / S34 / S35 1
4
2
TOC Config.3
S30 / S31 / S32 1
S33 / S34 /S35 4
Contact open
Contact closed
18 – 6
Installation
Depending on the amount of room space around the cradle in the apparatus, it may be necessary to wire the TOC prior to installation.
4
1
2 3
8
7
Then:
- Insert the circuit breaker into the cradle and rack it into the connected position  (page 6-1)
Catalog numbers
TOC Version Catalog No.
1 CONNECT, 1 TEST, 1 DISCONNECT WLGSGSW111
3 CONNECT, 2 TEST, 1 DISCONNECT WLGSGSW321
6 CONNECT WLGSGSW6
18 – 7
19 Mechanical circuit breaker interlocking
NOTE
For proper function of the interlocking device, the following minimum prerequisites have to be met:
1 Bowden cables are to be laid out as straight and as unbowed as possible.
2 Bending radii of the Bowden cables must exceed > 20" (500 mm).
3 The total curvature of the Bowden cable must not exceed 540 degrees.
4 When stacking interlocked circuit breakers vertically, the interlocking devices shall be vertically aligned with each other.
5 Circuit breakers intended to be interlocked must be positioned so that Bowden cables of 6 ft or 15 ft (2 m or 4.5 m) length can 
be laid out per the above requirements 1-4.
6 Before adjusting the interlocking device, the Bowden cables must be secured, e.g. using cable ties.
7 Adequate spacing is required to provide enough room for adjustment of the interlocking device.
(1)
(2)
(1) Cradle
(2) Fixed-mounted breaker
19.1 Configurations
A maximum of three circuit breakers may be interlocked.
19 – 1
19.1.1 General notes
S1 S2 S3
(1) (2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1) Output 1
(2) Holes with press nut for socket head cap screw M6 with washer for the configuration of the mechanical circuit breaker interlocking
(3) Non-interchangeable brackets
(4) Input 1
(5) Input 2
(6) Output 2
In the following configuration instructions, the following designations apply:

A1 : Output signal 1
E1 : Input signal 1
S1 : Circuit breaker 1
For example, in order to couple the output signal 1 of circuit breaker 1 with the input signal 2 of circuit breaker 2, 
the abbreviation S1 A1 - S2 E2 is used.
The states of the circuit breaker are shown at the front panel:
Circuit breaker closed
Circuit breaker open and not ready to close 

(interlocked)
Circuit breaker open and ready to close 

(not interlocked)
19 – 2
19.1.2 Mechanical interlocking two sources (open transition)
The two sources are interlocked to prevent paralleling (open transition).
Example Possible circuit breaker states

S1 S2
S1 S2
Description:
A circuit breaker can be closed only if the other is open.
Materials required:
Each circuit breaker has an interlocking module and a Bowden cable.
Order no.  (page 19-3)

Connections of Bowden cables:
1st Bowden cable: S1 A1 - S2 E1

2nd Bowden cable: S2 A1 - S1 E1
19 – 3
19.1.3 Mechanical interlocking two sources with a tie circuit breaker (open transition)
The two sources are interlocked to prevent paralleling (open transition).

S1 S2 S3
S1 S3
S2
Description:
Any two circuit breakers can be closed, with the third being interlocked.
Materials required:
Each circuit breaker has an interlocking module and a Bowden cables. Three additional Bowden cables must be ordered separately.
3rd Bowden cable: S2 A1 - S1 E1
4th Bowden cable: S2 A2 - S3 E2
19 – 4
19.1.4 Mechanical interlocking feeder circuit breakers (single load, open transition)
The feeder breakers are interlocked so that only one feeder may be closed at a time.

S1 S2 S3
S1 S2 S3
Description:
When one circuit breaker is closed, the other two cannot be closed.
Materials required:
Each circuit breaker has an interlocking module and a Bowden cable. Three additional Bowden cables must be ordered separately.
19 – 5
19.1.5 Mechanical interlocking three sources (open transition to standby system)
The standby system is mechanically interlocked with the two source circuit breakers to prevent paralleling the standby system with either or
both primary source(s).

S1 S2 S3
S1 S2 S3
Description:
Two circuit breakers (S1, S3) can be independently opened and closed, the third (S2) being “Ready-to-close” only if the other two are open.
If the third is closed, the other two cannot be closed.

Materials required:
Each circuit breaker has an interlocking module and a Bowden cable. A Bowden cable must be ordered separately.
19 – 6
19.1.6 Mechanical interlocking source and tie circuit breaker (open transition to standby system)
The standby system is mechanically interlocked with the tie circuit breaker to prevent paralleling with primary source.
S1 S2 S3
S1 S3
S2
Description:
One circuit breaker (S1) can be opened and closed independently of the two others. The two others cancel each other out, i.e. one can only
be closed if the other is open.
Materials required:
Two of the three circuit breakers (S2, S3) each have an interlocking module and a Bowden cable.
19 – 7
19.2 Installing interlocking module
WARNING
- Switch off and discharge the closing spring

 (page 23-2)
- Remove the breaker from the cradle 
 (page 23-3)
or remove the fixed-mounted breaker if necessary  (page 5-2)
- Remove front panel and side cover on the right, if required
 (page 23-4)
19.2.1 Installing intermediate shaft and coupling
Mechanical interlooking module
with ring
For frame size I & II, and frame size III fixed mount
L2 assembled
1
L1
-5
0422
long lever short lever

aligned
Frame size Hexagon shaft length L1 (mm) Length of assembly L2 (mm)

I 48 59
II 118 129
III (fixed mount only) 232 243
19 – 8
For frame size III, draw out version:
mechanical interlocking module
with ring 2 long levers
2
3
6 Hold
8
9
NOTE
Working through step 9, the intermediate shaft must engage in a hole inside the circuit breaker.
Only then it will be possible - working through step 10 - to fit the support for the intermediate shaft in the guide of the side wall.
19 – 9
Short
lever
outside
10
Function check
Then:
- Replace front panel and side cover on the right, if it was removed  (page 23-4)
19 – 10
19.2.2 Fitting interlocking module
Note
If there isn't enough free space for installation on the right side of the circuit breaker inside the cubicle, it may be advantageous to 
pre-assemble the Bowden cables on the output side before fitting the interlocking module.  (page 19-12)
(2) (3) (4)

(1)
3
2
Size
5 1
8 Nm
(5)
(7) (6)
(3) (7)
(1) Cradle
(2) Fixed-mounted breaker
(3) 2x socket head cap screw M6x12 with strain washer
(4) 1x socket head cap screw M6x25 with strain washer and square nut
(5) 2x socket head cap screw M6x35 with strain washer
(6) 2x jam nut; penetrates into mounting foot by tightening; if necessary, prevent jam nut from rotating
(7) 1x washer with large outside diameter
Then:
- Install back the breaker  (page 5-2)
19 – 11
19.2.3 Mounting the Bowden cables
Fitting Bowden cable on output site
4
6
1
5
7
3 2
Securing the Bowden cable
0256-2_u
R > 20”
(500 mm)
Installing the Bowden cable at the input of the circuit breaker to be interlocked
6
1
3
5 7
19 – 12
(1)
(1)
(1) Steel index clip
Adjusting the Bowden cable
Then:
- According to the planned configuration of the circuit breaker interlocking, screw socket head cap screws with toothed lock
washers, respectively plastite-screws with lock washers into the associated index clips if applicable Configurations (page 19-1)
- Insert the draw-out circuit breaker into the cradle, push into disconnected position, close the cubicle door if required and rack it
into connected position  (page 6-1)
19 – 13
19.2.4 Function check
- Close the cubicle doors

- Charge closing spring of circuit breakers to be interlocked  (page 6-4)
- Test the various possibilities of the planned interlocking configuration one after the other
- Re-adjust Bowden cables if necessary
Then:
- Discharge the closing spring of the circuit breakers to be interlocked  (page 23-2)
Note
The following maintenance points must be followed:
1 The adjustment of the Bowden cables needs to be checked after the first 100 breaker operations and must be readjusted if 
necessary.
2 The adjustment of the interlocking device needs to be checked and, if necessary, readjusted every 1000 operations or at least
once every year.
3 During the inspection, the Bowden cables have to be checked against kinks and abrasions, split wires of the exposed 
steel cable, damage to the cable housing and the adjustment unit (tube setting with thread and nut) and have to be readjusted 
if necessary. In addition, the movability of movable parts of the interlocking device in their bearings needs to be examined.
4 In extreme environmental conditions (e.g. increased environmental temperature or exposure to chemicals) maintenance checks
needs to be performed more frequently.
5 When maintaining the circuit breaker, check the operation of the interlock device and replace as necessary. See table (page -14).
Catalog Numbers
Mechanical Interlocking Catlog number

Mechanical interlock assembly WLNTLK
Qty.(1) Bowden Cable - 2m WLNTLWIRE2
Qty.(1) Bowden Cable - 4.5m WLNTLWIRE4
19 – 14
20 Arc chute covers
The arc chute cover is available as an optional accessory for cradles.

The cover is provided to protect the breaker from larger foreign objects (e.g. tools).
20.1 Field installation
DANGER
20 – 1
Frame size II
Size
5 2 1
2
6
8 8
(1)
9
Size 9
5 7 (2)
7 10
8 Nm PH 2
71 lb-in
3,2 Nm
3 28 lb-in
4
(3)
5 4
5
(2) Self-tapping screw M4 x10
Frame size III
For frame size III, installation is essentially the same, but the steps 6 to 9 can be omitted, since the related part is already installed.
20 – 2
20.2 Catalog numbers
Frame size Catalog No.
WLGARC2
II *)
Arc chute cover for cradle (3-pole)
WLGARC3
III **)
WL4GARC2
II
Arc chute cover for cradle (4-pole)
WL4GARC3
III
*) Not available for FS II fused circuit breakers

**) Not available for FS III M-class
20 – 3
21 Door sealing frame
Dimension drawing of door cutout
Front view of the cubicle door
(1) Mounting surface of the cradle

(2) Center of breaker front panel
(3) Eight mounting holes for the door sealing frame
21 – 1
Installing the door sealing frame
2
3
Catalog No.
Door sealing frame WLDSF
Not for use with fuse carriages.
21 – 2
l
22 Plexiglas breaker cover
NOTE
Following a short circuit interruption, check that the Plexiglas breaker cover is firmly in place and the seal is maintained.
Dimension drawing for door cutout and mounting holes
(1) Center of breaker front panel

(2) 4 mounting holes for hinges
(3) Mounting surface of circuit breaker or cradle
22 – 1
Attaching the Plexiglas cover
(1) Cubicle door with door cutout

(2) Plexiglas cover
(3) Hinge pin
(4) 2 hinges with opening function (right and left)
(5) 8 x Socket head cap screws M5 with washer and lock nuts
Installation of the right side hinge in the same fashion.
Handling:
To open the Plexiglas cover, push the hinge pins on the left or right hinge together or, to remove the Plexiglas cover, unlock both hinges.
Catalog number
Catalog No.
Plexiglas cover WLPGC
22 – 2
23 Maintenance
DANGER
maintenance.
WARNING
Qualified Personnel
For the purpose of this instruction manual and these product labels, a "qualified person" is one who is familiar with the
installation, construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved and who, 
in addition, has the following qualifications:
d) Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and label circuits and equipment in accordance with
established safety practices.
e) Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety practices.
f) Is trained in administering first aid.

The WL circuit breaker is designed and constructed to the highest standard of quality, using the best materials available. Design tests and
experience have shown that the circuit breakers can withstand and perform greater than the minimum requirements of the associated
design and performance standards. Because of the variability possible due to ambient conditions, it is recommended that these circuit
breakers be placed on a regular inspection and maintenance cycle.
Contact assemblies need to be changed depending on their condition, but no later than
- 12,500 operations in FS II up to 1600 A; (3- and 4-pole)
- 10,000 operations in FS II 3200 A; (3- and 4-pole)
- 10,000 operations in FS III; (3- and 4-pole)
The switchgear operator must determine the inspection intervals depending on the conditions under which the circuit breaker is used:
- minimum 1 time per year
- after breaking heavy current
After 1000 open/close operations, it is recommended to inspect:
- arc chutes and contact systems
- mechanical functionality
- main and auxiliary circuits, function, condition, and continuity
verify all trip unit settings and adjust, if necessary 
23 – 1
23.1 Preparation for maintenance
23.1.1 Opening the circuit breaker and discharging the closing spring
OPEN the circuit breaker
Secondary Disconnects
Position Indicator
2
Disconnect secondary
red
circuits
green
CLOSE the circuit breaker
Depress the OPEN button

again
Indications
23 – 2
23.1.2 Removing the circuit breaker from the cradle
Crank the circuit breaker into the disconnected position

- Unlock racking handle / withdraw racking handle  (page 6-3)
Stop
red
Position indicator
blue
green
Push in the racking handle
1 2
3
4
NOTICE
Racking Handle Damage.
Turning the racking handle beyond the stop will cause damage to the racking mechanism.
When the stop is reached, rotate the handle counter-clockwise until it can be stowed.
Pull circuit breaker into withdrawn position and remove
2
3
23 – 3
23.2 Changing front panel
DANGER
WARNING
23.2.1 Removing front panel
1 1
2
PH 2
23.2.2 Reinstalling the front panel
2
3 3
PH 2 1
2,5 Nm
22 lb-in
23 – 4
23.3 Checking arc chutes
It is recommended that the arc chutes be inspected on a regular basis.The arc splitter plates erode as the result of load breaking. This
constitutes normal wear. The erosion of the arc splitter plates can manifest itself as wear of the plates, a layer of soot, or small spots of
collections of molten metal. In case of heavy wear (severe erosion, large deposits of molten metal, etc), the circuit breaker should be
replaced.
It is also necessary to replace the arc chutes when the circuit breaker's internal contacts are replaced. See Checking contact
erosion (page 23-10) for evaluation of contact wear, and Replacing the circuit breaker internal contact assemblies (page 23-21) for internal
contact replacement.
DANGER
WARNING
23 – 5
23.3.1 Removing arc chutes
For Frame Size II:

For Frame Size III:
1
2 4
4
3 1 5 PH 2
0043-01
1 Loosen screw by approx. 15 mm; do not remove it; 

FS III and FS II, class C: 
remove screw completely
2 Push the cover back;
FS III: lift the cover carefully
3 Remove the cover
4 Take out the arc chute
WARNING
Damage to arc chute components.
Mishandling may lead to broken insulation plates of the arc chute housing, and compromised insulation capacity.
Do not stand arc chutes up, when placing them on a table, or any other surface outside of the circuit breaker. The arc chutes should be
placed on their side to prevent breakage of the insulation plates.
23.3.2 Visual inspection
In the case of heavy wear (burnout on arc splitter plates), replace the arc chutes.
23 – 6
23.3.3 Installing arc chutes
1 2 5
3
PH 2
For frame size III
4
6
PH 2
0043-02
23 – 7
Frame size II and frame size III
3
2
PH 2
4
10 Nm
0043-02 89 lb-in
1 Insert arc chute, push cover back if necessary

2 Slide the cover into place
3 Check position of the 2 screens, FS III only
4 Hook the cover carefully into place and fold it down, FS III only
5 Insert the screw and tighten to the specified torque
Interrupting class Frame size Catalog No.
all II WLARC2
H, L, F III WLARC3
M III WLARCM3
23 – 8
23.4 Inspection of arc chute covers
The arc chute cover is available as an optional accessory for cradles.
DANGER
0695-01
In addition to the arc chute inspection, an inspection of the arc chute covers is also recommended. The powder-coated inner sides of the
covers which face the arc chutes must not be burned.
A layer of soot or small spots of collections of molten metal are normal.
If the powder-coating on the inner side of the cover has burned through or damaged, this must be replaced Arc chute covers (page 20-1)
in the opposite order
23 – 9
23.5 Checking contact erosion
It is strongly recommended that the breaker's internal contacts be inspected on a regular basis. Load breaking and short-circuit trips cause
contact erosion. The WL circuit breaker is equipped with a contact erosion indicator for monitoring wear of the circuit breaker's internal
contacts.
DANGER
WARNING
Will cause serious personal injury.
Do not place hands or objects within the arc chamber.
- OPEN circuit breaker the circuit breaker and discharge the closing spring  (page 23-2)
- Manually charge the closing spring  (page 6-4)
- Close the circuit breaker  (page 6-7)
- Remove the arc chutes  (page 23-6).
View with the circuit breaker closed
(4) (2)
(5)
(1)
(3)
0071-1
(1) Indicator pin
(2) Indicator pin is visible in the big recess
(3) Indicator pin is no longer visible
(4) Arcing tip
(5) Arc Chamber
If the indicator pin is no longer visible, the contact system must be replaced.
The contact system must also be replaced if:

- the end of the circuit breaker's mechanical service life according to its technical data has been reached (due to wear on the copper
braids).
- heavy wear of the arcing tip is visible
(triangular tips have lost approx. 5/16“ of their original length)
23 – 10
23.6 Replacing the internal current sensors
DANGER
WARNING
23 – 11
Preparation for installation
Fixed-mounted circuit breaker Draw-out circuit breaker
OPEN
Secondary circuit
B Position indicator
Disconnect auxiliary circuits
green
CLOSE
OPEN
Indicators
23 – 12
Current Sensor Calibration
In order to maintain optimal sensing accuracy, replace current sensors with current sensors with identical calibration markings. The calibra-
tion mark (A, B, C, or D) is marked on the face of the current sensor. Please consult the factory for ordering information.
Remove Finger Cluster Assemblies (Drawout Only)
23.6.1 Removing vertical adapter
1 1 3
3
Size
5 mm
0640-3
2
23 – 13
Remove Bus Brace Assemblies
For frame size II only:

Fit support for the lower contacts together with the sensor covers
All upper screws
Size
(1) 5 mm
5 Nm
45 lb-in
All lower screws
(2)
0524-1
Size
5 mm
8 Nm
71 lb-in
(1) Frame size II, 3200 A

(2) Frame size II, 800 - 2000 A
23 – 14
Removing current sensors
Lay circuit breaker on its side
1 Remove cover of cable duct

2 Detach connectors
Size
5 mm
3 Remove current sensor covers

4 Remove current sensors
23 – 15
Installing current sensors
All lower screws All upper screws
1
Size Size
2 5 mm 5 mm
10 Nm 5 Nm
89 lb-in 45 lb-in
3 4
1 Lay circuit breaker on its side, insert connecting wire

2 Insert current sensors
3 Reposition sensor covers
4 and attach
NOTICE
Damage to circuit breaker housing.
Turning in self-tapping screws not in the existing threads will damage the breaker housing and prevent the sensor cover
from beeing secured.
Tighten the screw as follows:

- Insert the screw by hand with slight inward pressure
- Rotate the screw counter-clockwise by hand until the thread fits
- Tighten
- Tighten to a torque of 45 lb-in
23 – 16
Reinstall Bus Brace Assemblies
All upper screws
Size
(1) 5 mm
5 Nm
45 lb-in
All lower screws
(2)
0524-1
Size
5 mm
8 Nm
71 lb-in

(2) Frame size II, 800 - 2000 A
Reconnect Current Sensors
5 6
5 Establish plug connections
WARNING
Loss of overcurrent protection.
Incomplete connections of the sensor to the sensor wire harness may result in loss of overcurrent protection.
Make sure that the connectors are fully inserted and latched when connecting the sensor cable harness to the sensor.
23 – 17
Reinstall Finger Cluster Assemblies (Drawout Only)
A B
2 3
*)
Size
1 4
10 mm
4
1 70 Nm
70 Nm
0640-4 50 ft-lb
50 ft-lb
0643-02 2
3
*) For frame size II, 800 - 2000 A only
A Version A
B Version B
NOTICE
Incorrect adjustment of the vertical connections on the circuit breaker may cause damage to the finger cluster assemblies
when the circuit breaker is racked into the cradle.
Adjust the vertical connections according to the dimension drawings on the following pages.
23 – 18
Frame size II
NOTE
To achieve correct finger cluster position in frame size II, center the vertical adapter of the center pole (phase B) on the copper connector
of the frame and tighten it. Shift the vertical adapters (7) of the outer poles (phase A & B) outwards until the specified distance of 5 1/4" is
reached, and tighten them.
A A
(2) (1)
(8)
(3) (8) (2)
(7) (4) (3)
(7) (4)
(2)
(3) (2)
(4) (3)
(5)
(6) B B
0644-01
Only FS II (3200 A)
(1)
Only FS II (800, 1600, 2000 A) (8) (8) (3)

(3) (9)
(7) (9) (7)
(3) (3)
(9)
(9)
0640-5
Only FS II (800, 1600, 2000 A) Only FS II (3200 A)

(1) Spacer
(2) Hex-head screw
800 A, 1600 A: M12 x 45,
2000 A: M12 x 55,
3200 A: M12 x 80,
3200 A: 4-pole version, N-pole bottom M12 x 80
(4) Threaded plate
(5) Washer
(6) 800 A, 1600 A, 2000 A: M12 nut
3200 A: threaded plate
(7) Vertical adapter
(8) Finger cluster
(9) Carriage bolt M12 with belleville washer and nut
4-pole versions:
1600, 2000 A N-pole top and bottom: M12 x 60
3200 A, N-pole top: M12 x 75
A Construction Style A
B Construction Style B
23 – 19
For the noted finger clusters, the finger cluster guard should be oriented away from the center pole(s) of the circuit breaker. For
interior pole (i.e. B-phase, and 4-pole A-phase), the orientation is insignificant.
Functional Test
Test and document the EMC filter installation with the WLTS Hand-held Trip Unit Test Set, in accordance with SIemens instruction “WLTS
Hand-Held Test Set Application Guide,” (document number CBBR-WLTSA-0716).
23 – 20
23.7 Replacing the circuit breaker internal 
contact assemblies
If the circuit breaker's internal contacts need to be replaced following an inspection, this can be done using the following procedure.
When replacing the circuit breaker's internal contacts, it is recommended that all three poles be replaced at the same time. It is also required
that the arc chutes be replaced when the breaker internal contacts be replaced at the same time. See Checking arc chutes (page 23-5) for
replacement arc chutes.
DANGER
WARNING
NOTE
Pole assemblies are not field-replaceable for frame size III, M-class circuit breakers.
23 – 21
23.7.1 Removing front panel
1
2 1
PH 2
23.7.2 Removing arc chutes
 (page 23-6)
23.7.3 Removing vertical adapter
1 1 3
3
Size
5 mm
0640-3
2
Removing lower contact supports in FS II  (page 23-30).
23.7.4 Removing pole assemblies
Mounting actuating shaft retainer
NOTICE
Damage to the operator mechanism.
Failure to install the actuating shaft retainer will cause the closing spring to discharge and will result in the operator
mechanism being misaligned and damaged.
Follow steps 1 through 5 closely to ensure that the actuating shaft retainer is properly installed.
23 – 22
1
1 Remove hole plug

2 Press contacts together and hold them while completing steps 3, 4 and 5
Actuating shaft retainer

4
3
5
PH 2
3 4 5 Mount and fix main shaft retainer
Removing racking shaft

Strip off the driving collar of the spring dump mechanism when extracting the racking shaft  (page 23-31).
1 2
1 Remove retaining ring

2 Remove crank
3 Pull out racking shaft on the other side
23 – 23
Removing current sensors
Lay circuit breaker on its side
1 Remove cover of cable duct

2 Detach connectors
Size
5 mm
3 Remove current sensor covers

4 Remove current sensors
Frame size II: unhook the circuit breaker feet
Size
4 mm
1
2 Loosen only
1 Place circuit breaker in upright position, remove both circuit breaker feet, remove screw
2 Only loosen these screws
23 – 24
Frame size III: Remove circuit breaker feet
NOTE
Before removing the screws, support circuit breaker in such a way that the circuit breaker feet are not supporting the weight of the 
circuit breaker.
1
(3) (2) (1) (2) (3)
(1) Leave this area open

(2) Suitable support circuit breaker here
(3) Circuit breaker feet
1 Remove screws
2 Remove circuit breaker feet
Removing rear wall
3
Size
6 mm
Frame size III only:
4 Size
8 mm
3 Remove upper screws

4 Remove lower screws
5 Support circuit breaker

6 Rearwall carefully draw off to view the end position retaining springs
7 Note the position of the end position retaining springs
8 Separate and remove rearwall
9 Remove end position retaining springs
Removing upper fixed contacts
1 Remove three bolts and associated nuts

2 Remove fixed contact
23 – 25
7
6 8
9
5
Size
5 mm
23 – 26
Removing lower moving contacts
Clean and grease bearings and coupling bolts before assembly.

(Grease: Isoflex Topas NB 52, Fa. Klüber Lubrication München KG)
1 Support connecting bars

4 1 Push out coupling bolt
1 Remove coupling bolt
1 Remove pole assemblies
2
23.7.5 Installing pole assemblies
Installing upper fixed contacts in rear wall
Size
1 5 mm
10 Nm
89 lb-ft
2
2 Mount contact and insert square nut in recess

3 Fix contacts
Re-tighten screws of guide horns with 89 lb-ft;
Installing lower moving contacts
Clean and grease bearings and coupling bolts before assembly.
(Grease: Isoflex Topas NB 52, Fa. Klüber Lubrication München KG)
Installing lower moving contacts
4
3
2
1
1 Mount supports for connecting bars
2 Mount central pole assembly
3 Insert coupling bolt
4 Mount external pole assemblies
23 – 27
Installing rear wall
(First remove supports for pole assemblies)
WARNING
Pinching or crimping of the current sensor cable harness may result in loss of overcurrent protection.
Lay the cable harness carefully and do not pinch or crimp the wires.
5
1 Insert end position retaining springs
2 Inspect to ensure that the coupling bolts are
centered
3 Attach rear wall
4 Insert connecting bars through the rear wall
1
4
2 3
Frame Size II: Frame Size III:
Upper Lower
Upper Lower
Size Size Size Size

6 mm 6 mm 8 mm 6 mm
18 Nm 12 Nm 25 Nm 18 Nm
13 ft-lb 9 ft-lb 18 ft-lb 13 ft-lb
5 Screw tight of the bottom first, starting in the middle; 

short screws on the bottom, long screws on the top.
WARNING
Reduction of current carrying capacity.
Incorrect assembly may result in a reduction of contact force, which may reduce the current carrying capabilities of the cir-
cuit breaker.
After re-assembling the circuit breaker housing, the contacts should be inspected to make sure that they are aligned and mobile.
This is accomplished by closing the circuit breaker, and observing the main contacts from above (looking down through the breaker's
arc chambers).
Function test:
It must be possible to press the contacts completely together, and they must return independently to their original position. If this is not the
case, loosen the rear wall and check that the end position retaining springs are properly in place.
23 – 28
Attaching the circuit breaker feet
Size
4 mm
10 Nm 7
89 lb-in
Installing current sensors
All lower screws All upper screws
1
Size Size
2 5 mm 5 mm
10 Nm 5 Nm
89 lb-in 45 lb-in
3 4
1 Lay circuit breaker on its side, insert connecting wire

2 Insert current sensors
3 Reposition sensor covers
4 and attach
NOTICE
Damage to circuit breaker housing.
Turning in self-tapping screws not in the existing threads will damage the breaker housing and prevent the sensor cover
from beeing secured.
Tighten the screw as follows:

- Insert the screw by hand with slight inward pressure
- Rotate the screw counter-clockwise by hand until the thread fits
- Tighten
- Tighten to a torque of 45 lb-in
23 – 29
All upper screws
Size
(1) 5 mm
5 Nm
45 lb-in
All lower screws
(2)
0524-1
Size
5 mm
8 Nm
71 lb-in

(2) Frame size II, 800 - 2000 A
5 6
5 Establish plug connections
WARNING
Incomplete connections of the sensor to the sensor wire harness may result in loss of overcurrent protection.
Make sure that the connectors are fully inserted and latched when connecting the sensor cable harness to the sensor.
23 – 30
to ETU
0520
current current current
sensor L1 sensor L2 sensor L3
6 Attach cable chanel cover
Removing the main shaft retainer
1 PH 2
2 3
1 Place circuit breaker in an upright position, press and hold the contacts together, through steps 2 and 3
2 Unscrew the main shaft retainer
3 Remove the main shaft retainer
4 Remove the actuator
5 Attach the cover
Installing the racking shaft

When inserting the racking shaft slide on the driving collar for the spring dump mechanism. Position both flanges of the driving collar in the
groove of the circuit breaker housing.
23 – 31
3 2
1 Insert racking shaft

2 Mount crank
3 Secure crank
23.7.6 Adjusting the contact wear indicator
- Charge the closing spring manually  (page 6-4)

- Close  (page 6-7))
screwdriver
10 mm / 3/8‘‘ blade
(2)
(1)
(3)
0071-2
(1) Indicator pin

(2) Indicator pin before adjustment
(3) Indicator pin adjusted
Using a screwdriver, cut the plastic indicator pin along the upper edge of the large recess.
If the indicator pin is no longer visible, the contact system must be replaced.
23 – 32
23.7.7 Attaching the vertical adapter
A B
2 3
*)
Size
1 4
10 mm
4
1 70 Nm
70 Nm
0640-4 50 ft-lb
50 ft-lb
0643-02
3 2
*) For frame size II, 800 - 2000 A only
A Version A
B Version B
NOTICE
Incorrect adjustment of the vertical connections on the circuit breaker may cause damage to the finger cluster assemblies
when the circuit breaker is racked into the cradle.
Adjust the vertical connections according to the dimension drawings on the following pages.
23 – 33
Frame size II
NOTE
To achieve correct finger cluster position in frame size II, center the vertical adapter of the center pole (phase B) on the copper connector
of the frame and tighten it. Shift the vertical adapters (7) of the outer poles (phase A & B) outwards until the specified distance of 5 1/4" is
reached, and tighten them.
A A
(2) (1)
(8)
(3) (8) (2)
(7) (4) (3)
(7) (4)
(2)
(3) (2)
(4) (3)
(5)
(6) B B
0644-01
Only FS II (3200 A)
(1)
Only FS II (800, 1600, 2000 A) (8) (8) (3)

(3) (9)
(7) (9) (7)
(3) (3)
(9)
(9)
0640-5
Only FS II (800, 1600, 2000 A) Only FS II (3200 A)

(1) Spacer
(2) Hex-head screw
800 A, 1600 A: M12 x 45,
2000 A: M12 x 55,
3200 A: M12 x 80,
3200 A: 4-pole version, N-pole bottom M12 x 80
(4) Threaded plate
(5) Washer
(6) 800 A, 1600 A, 2000 A: M12 nut
3200 A: threaded plate
(8) Finger cluster
(9) Carriage bolt M12 with belleville washer and nut
4-pole versions:
1600, 2000 A N-pole top and bottom: M12 x 60
3200 A, N-pole top: M12 x 75
A Construction Style A
B Construction Style B
23 – 34
Frame size III
NOTE
To achieve correct finger cluster position in frame size III, center the vertical adapter of all poles on the copper connector of the frame.
(6) (1)
(2)
(5)
(3)
(4)
(1) Hex-head screw M12 x 80

(3) Washer
(4) M12 nut
(6) Finger cluster
(1) Reinforced bend of the inner finger clusters can be adjusted as desired.
Reinforced bend of the inner finger clusters can be adjusted as desired.
23 – 35
23.7.8 Order numbers
(1) For the noted finger clusters, the finger cluster edge guard should be oriented away from the center pole(s) of the circuit breaker. 
For interior poles (i.e. B-phase, and 4-pole A-phase), the orientation is insignificant.
Adjustment of reinforced bend of internal fingerclusters open
Breaker internal contact assembly:

(one required for each phase)
Frame size Max. circuit breaker rated current Suitable for circuit breaker types Order No.
In max (A)
WLN2A308, WLN2A316 RCS2N10
WLS2A308, WLS2A316 RCS2S10
800 / 1600 WLH2A308, WLF2A308, WLH2A316,

RCS2H10
WLF2A316, WLF2S308, WLF2S316
WLL2A308, WLL2A316,
RCS2L10
WLL2S308, WLL2S316
II WLS2A320 RCS2S15
2000 WLH2A320, WLF2A320, WLF2S320 RCS2HF15
WLL2A320, WLL2S320 RCS2L15
WLS2A332 RCS2S30
3200 WLH2A332 RCS2H30
WLL2A332, WLL2S332 RCS2L30
WLH3A340, WLF3A340, WLH3A350,

WLF3A350, WLF3S340, WLF3S350, RCS3HF30
WLF3A332, WLF3S332
III 4000 / 5000
WLL3A340, WLL3A350, 
RCS3L30
WLL3S340, WLL3S350
M-class: 3200 / 4000 / 5000 WLM3A332, WLM3A340, WLM3A350 RCS3M30
all all Grease used for assembly WLBGREASE
23 – 36
23.7.9 Attaching the front panel
2
3 3
PH 2
1
2,5 Nm
22 lb-in
23.7.10 Installing the arc chutes
When the breaker internal contacts are replaced, it is also necessary to replace the arc chutes. See Installing arc chutes (page 23-7).
23.7.11 Mechanical function test
- Charge the closing spring manually  (page 6-4)

- Close  (page 6-7)
- Open  (page 6-7)
- Check again the wear indicator  (page 23-10)
23 – 37
23.8 Exchanging the primary disconnects
DANGER
(1)
(2)
(1) Finger cluster

(2) Stab tip
23.8.1 Exchanging the finger cluster
2 7
(1)
PZ 2
1
8
6
3,2 Nm
5 28 lb-in
PZ 2
10
3
4 9
(1) Self-tapping M4 screw
23 – 38
NOTE
Ensure, that the shoulder bolt has free play in the slotted holes of the brass bracket of the finger cluster.
Lubricating the finger clusters

Clean and grease finger contacts on both ends (between stab tip and finger cluster, and between vertical adapter and finger cluster) before
assembly. (Grease: Isoflex Topas NB 52 by Klüber Lubrication)
Attaching vertical adapter with finger cluster  (page 23-33)
Frame size Max. circuit breaker rated current Catalog No.

In max (A)
800 / 1600 WLFNGR10
II 2000 WLFNGR15
Replacement Finger Cluster Kit
3200 WLFNGR30
III 4000 / 5000 WLFCK3
Grease used for assemlby all all WLBGREASE
23 – 39
23.8.3 Exchanging the stab tip
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Stab tip

(2) Socket head cap screw M6
(3) Hex-head screw M12
9
3 Size 8 8 Nm
5 mm 71 lb-in
7 6
5
2 70 Nm
1 50 ft-lb
Size
10 mm
0649-4
FS III only:
(3)
(1)
0649-3
(2)
Size
8 mm
(1) 6x Socket head cap screw M10x40 (40Nm /28ft-lb) and belleville washer
(2) Stab tip bridge
(3) Vertical bus connector
23 – 40
Frame size Max. circuit breaker rated current Catalog No.

In max (A)
800 / 1600 WLGST10163LL

Stab tip line II 2000 WLGST15203LL
3200 WLGST30323LL
800 / 1600
WLGST10163LL
(2 bolt hole pattern)
800 / 1600
WLGST10163LD
Stab tip load II 2000
WLGST15203LL
2000
WLGST15203LD
3200 WLGST30323LL
Stab tip load and line III 4000 / 5000 WLGST30503LL
Grease for contact fingers all all WLBGREASE
23 – 41
23.9 Cleaning and greasing the circuit breaker
Finger cluster
(1) (1) (1)
0645-01
(1) Greasing points
1 Wipe away old grease and
2 apply new grease
23.10 Cleaning and greasing the cradle
(1)
(1) Greasing points

1 Clean the track of the rails and
2 relubricate the designated points
Grease Catalog No.
Isoflex Topas NB52

WLBGREASE
manufactured by Klüber Lubrication München KG
23 – 42
24 Primary injection testing
DANGER
maintenance.
Qualified Personnel
For the purpose of this instruction manual and these product labels, a "qualified person" is one who is familiar with the installation, construc-
tion and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved and who, 
in addition, has the following qualifications:
a) Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and label circuits and equipment in accordance with established
safety practices.
b) Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety practices.
c) Is trained in administering first aid.
Observe Circuit Breaker Settings

The WL circuit breaker ships from the factory with the lowest possible settings. For exisiting circuit breaker installations, it is important to
notice and take record of all customer settings of the circuit breaker before performing any testing. These settings should be restored at the
conclusion of all inspection and testing.
Proper handling of WL Circuit Breakers

It is important to adhere to all rigging and transportation requirements for Siemens type WL circuit breakers (page 4-1).
CAUTION
Fragile Assembly
Finger Clusters may become damaged or disassembled. Connection may overheat and cause property damage.
Do not rest breaker on finger clusters; avoid impact to finger clusters.
Do not insert busbars wider than 0.40 inch [10 mm] into the finger clusters for the following circuit breaker frames:
WLN2A308, WLN2A316, WLS2A308, WLS2A316, WLS2D308, WLS2D312, WLS2D316, WLH2A308, WLH2A316, WLH2S308,
WLH2S316, WLH2Z308, WLH2Z316, WLL2A308, WLL2A316, WLL2D308, WLL2D312, WLL2D316
WLS1D308, WLS1D312, WLS1D316, WLS1D320, WLL1D308, WLL1D312, WLL1D316, WLL1D320, WLL1Z308, WLL1Z312,
WLL1Z316, WLL1Z320, WLN2A320, WLS2A320, WLS2D320, WLH2A320, WLH2S320, WLH2Z320, WLL2A320, WLL2D320,
WLF2A308, WLF2A316, WLF2A320, WLF2S308, WLF2S316, WLF2S320
WLN2A332, WLS2A332, WLS2D330, WLH2A332, WLH2S332, WLH2Z325, WLH2Z330, WLL2A332, WLL2D330, WLC2D308,
WLC2D312, WLC2D316, WLC2D320, WLC2D325, WLC2D330, WLL3A340, WLL3A350, WLL3S340, WLL3S350, WLL3D340,
WLL3D350, WLL3Z340, WLL3Z350, WLF3A332, WLF3A340, WLF3A350, WLF3S332, WLF3S340, WLF3S350, WLM3A340,
WLM3A350, WLC3D340, WLC3D350.
Visually inspect all finger clusters prior to installing drawout circuit breakers.
Do not energize a circuit breaker with a damaged finger cluster assembly.
24 – 1
24.1 General Notes
A few facts about WL trip units and breakers will help the tester understand how best to accomplish the required testing quickly and easily.
Air Core Sensor Technology

WL Breakers are equipped with air-core current sensors (Rogowsky coils, also known as linear couplers) and, as such, the ETUs cannot be
tested by conventional secondary injection techniques.
Ground Fault Protection

WL Breaker trip units can be equipped with ground fault protection according to the table below. Ground fault protection cannot be disabled
if it has been installed at the factory. Setting the Ground Fault Mode is either done via switch (see below) or via menu (page 9-44).
ETU Type Available Ground Fault Modes
Optional: 3 or 4 wire residual, and direct sensing, are both available with additional
ETU 745
ground fault protection module. Mode is set by switch.
Optional: 3 or 4 wire residual, and direct sensing, are both available with additional
ETU 755 / 776
ground fault protection module. Mode is set by soft setting.
Figure 1
Ground Fault Mode Switch
Ground Fault Trip

Pick-up Adjustment
Ground Fault Alarm Ground Fault Trip

Pick-up Adjustment Delay Adjustment
The ground fault pick-up points for the Ground Fault Alarm and Ground Fault Trip settings are independently configurable. The definitions of
the A - E dial settings are described below:
Pick-up Setting Frame Size 1 Frame Size 2 Frame Size 3
A 100 A 100 A 400 A
B 300 A 300 A 600 A
C 600 A 600 A 800 A
D 900 A 900 A 1000 A
E 1200 A 1200 A 1200 A
24 – 2
Ground Fault Mode Selection (Setting)
Before beginning to test, the Ground Fault Mode setting should be verified.
a. If connected to a 3- or 4-wire residual system, the mode switch must be in the summation position. In this mode, the ETU will per-
form a vector summation of phases A, B, C and if connected, N (Neutral). If this sum is not zero, a ground fault is present and the
ETU behaves according to the pickup and delay settings.
b. If connected in system where an external iron-core sensor detects the ground current (such as an MDGF scheme), the switch must
be in the Direct Sense position (down). If the switch is in this position, the trip unit will not do a residual calculation and will only
respond to a signal from an external iron-core sensor.
c. On an ETU776, these settings are done via the LCD and keypad as there is no physical switch.
Phase Loss Sensing

When single-phase testing, make sure that the short-time delay is not set to the 20ms setting. In this position, a phase-loss sensitivity func-
tion is enabled. This function is designed to protect motors from heavy imbalances and loss of one or more phases. When active, and the
trip unit detects that the least heavily loaded phase is 50% lower than the most heavily loaded phase, the long-time pickup setting(IR) is
reduced to 80% of setting indicated on the display or dial. When this unbalance condition no longer exists, the setting is returned to normal.
Single-phase testing will be recognized as a phase unbalance and the long-time pickup will be reduced to 80% of its set value. The resulting
trip timing will be faster than indicated in the trip curves. For an ETU776, the phase-loss sensing is controlled by the "PhaseSen" menu item
under the protective parameters. When short-time delay is set to 20ms, phase-loss sensing cannot be turned off.
External Ground Fault Sensor Inputs

There are three types of connections for ground fault protection:
a. If applied in a 4-wire system, there will be an external air-core sensor connected to the second ary wiring points X8.9 & 10.
b. If applied in a direct sensed scheme, there will be an external iron-core 1200:1 CT connected to secondary wiring points 
X8.11 & 12.
c. If applied in a 3-wire system, secondary wiring points X8.9 & 10 must be shorted together.
Activating the WL Trip Unit

The external neutral sensor does not provide power to the trip unit when current is flowing through it. The trip unit must be activated by an
auxiliary power source or phase current in order to detect and react to current flowing though the external neutral sensor.
The WL trip units will become active and begin protecting at approximately 80A in a single phase in Frame Size 1 & 2 breakers and approx-
imately 100A in a single phase in a FS3 breaker.
24 – 3
24.2 Primary Injection Phase Current Testing
Circuit Breakers Without Ground Fault Protection

WL Breakers equipped with trip units without ground fault protection can be easily single phase tested by injecting current into either the line
or load connection of any phase and out the opposite connection.
Figure 2
ETU
Circuit Breakers With 3- or 4-Wire Residual Ground Fault Protection

WL Breakers equipped with trip units with residual ground fault protection must be phase injected such that the ETU sees two active phases
which cancel each other out. This cancellation prevents the ground fault function from tripping. This cancellation is accomplished by inject-
ing current into the line side of one phase, out the load side, back into another load side and back out the line side.
Figure 3
ETU
If it is not possible to inject phase current into the breaker as shown in the figure above, the Ground Fault Mode switch can be used to tell the
ETU to look for a ground fault signal on a different set of terminals. As stated above, putting the Ground Fault Mode switch in the Direct
Sense position will cause the ETU to look for ground fault current on terminals X8.11 and X8.12 and not do the residual calculation. This
method can only be used if it is possible to remove the front cover of the breaker to access the switch on the side of the ETU. The switch
must be returned to its original position after testing is complete. On an ETU776, these settings are done via the LCD and keypad as there
is no physical switch.
24 – 4
24.3 Primary Injection Ground Fault Current Testing
Circuit Breakers With 3-Wire Residual Ground Fault Protection

Testing is accomplished by routing current through one phase of the breaker. The Ground Fault Mode switch must be in the up position
(summation symbol) in order for the residual ground fault detection to be tested.
Circuit Breakers using 4-Wire Residual Ground Fault Protection via the External Neutral Sensor (air core)
To test a WL breaker equipped with trip 4-wire residual ground fault protection, the ETU must first be activated by injecting 80-100A through
the breaker itself (Source A). Once the ETU is active, the test current can be injected through the external neutral sensor to verify its con-
nection and polarity (Source B). The external neutral sensor does not provide energy to the ETU to activate it.
Figure 4
Secondary Terminals External Air-Core Sensor on

X8-9 & X8-10 Neutral Bus
ETU
Source A
Source B
The same test can be conducted using a single power source. The ETU must be activated by injecting a minimum of 100A through the
breaker itself. The external neutral sensor does not provide energy to the ETU to activate it. Multiple windings through the external sensor
can be added to create greater imbalances.
Figure 5
Source
Secondary Terminals
X8-9 & X8-10
External Air-Core GF Sensor

on Neutral or Ground Bus
ETU
24 – 5
Also using a single source, the system can be tested to verify that the circuit breaker will not trip.
Figure 6
Secondary Terminals
X8-9 & X8-10
ETU
External Air-Core GF Sensor
Source
Circuit Breakers using Direct Sensing Ground Fault Protection via the External GF Sensor (iron core)
The WL trip units can be connected to an external 1200:1 iron core sensor to provide indication of a ground fault. This configuration
requires that the Ground Fault Mode switch be in the down (g) position. The ETU is activated by injecting 80-100A through the breaker itself
(Source A). Once the ETU is active, the test current can be injected through the external ground fault sensor to verify its connection and
polarity (Source B). The external ground fault sensor does not provide energy to the ETU to activate it.
Figure 7
Secondary Terminals External Iron Core Sensor on

X8-11 & X8-12 Neutral or Ground Bus
ETU
Source A
Source B
The same test can be conducted using a single power source. The ETU must be activated by injecting a minimum of 100A through the
breaker itself. The external neutral sensor does not provide energy to the ETU to activate it. Multiple windings through the external sensor
can be added to simulate greater neutral currents.
Figure 8
Secondary Terminals
X8-11 & X8-12
ETU
External Iron Core GF Sensor
Source
24 – 6
24.4 Achieving Correct External Neutral Sensor Polarity
(for air-core sensors WLNCT2 and WLNCT3)

The polarity of the neutral sensor must be observed when installing the neutral sensors in the apparatus. The "dot" side of the sensor, iden-
tified as P2 in the drawing below, must face in the same direction as the bottom stabs on the breaker. The schematics and elevation drawing
identify the P2 side with a "dot" because that is the label side of the sensor, and most installers and service technicians are accustomed to
the label side of the sensor being the 'dot' side. There is also a P2 in a circle on the face of the sensor.
For a top-fed breaker (line on top and load on bottom), the P2 must go towards the load (away from the neutral bus).
For a bottom-fed breaker (line on the bottom and load on the top), the P2 must go towards the neutral bus (away from the load).
As long as the X8-9 and X8-10 leads are connected to the correct terminals on the breaker, the polarity relationship between the internal
breaker sensors and the external neutral sensor will be correct for the rules given above.
Figure 9
Neutral Bus
Upper Breaker Stab
P1 P1
X8.9
Breaker Internal CT Polarity must match External Neutral CT

X8.10
P2 P2
Lower Breaker Stab
The correct neutral sensor polarization is achieved when the P1 mark on the neutral sensor is oriented on the neutral bus so that it matches
the upper stabs of the breaker (normally the line side). Even if the breaker is bottom fed, the load flow must be such that the lower stabs of
the breaker and the P2 mark on the neutral sensor are matched (both line or both load).
The wires from the neutral sensor are color coded as follows:
- BLACK => X8.9 = P1
- BLUE => X8.10 = P2
These wires terminate in a plastic 2-pin connector which is usually connected to a black twisted pair. At the far end of the twisted pair, the
two wires are labeled. These wires are usually connected to a shielded, twisted pair which brings the signal to the secondary disconnects
(X8.9 & X8.10). If incorrect polarity is detected at the ETU in spite of what appears to be a correctly mounted neutral sensor, then the wires
crossing between shipping splits should be inspected carefully.
24 – 7
Sample Circuit Breaker Test Record
The following form is an example of a typical report for recording results of a circuit breaker or ground fault system conformance test. This
form may be used in abscence of a preferred document (copies may be required, based on the number of circuit breakers.
CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST RECORD
Date Tested: Circuit Breaker ID:
Tested By:
Results:
CIRCUIT BREAKER TEST RECORD
Date Tested: Circuit Breaker ID:
Tested By:
Results:
24 – 8
25 Disposal
25.1 Low-voltage circuit breakers disposal
Siemens circuit breakers are environmentally friendly products, predominantly consisting of recyclable materials. For disposal, some disas-
sembly, separation, and professional-services handling may be required.
WARNING
Stored energy.
Can cause death or serious injury.
Mechanisms contain stored energy, which may be released during disassembly.
Wear suitable protection and take appropriate precautions when disconnecting and removing parts.
WARNING
Heavy objects.
Can cause death or serious injury.
Disassembly may cause an unbalanced load, and could result in falling objects.
Take appropriate precautions in a properly designated workspace to maximize support and stability.
Materials to be handled include but are not limited to:

- Metals:Should be transferred and recycled as mixed scrap metals.
- Plastics:Plastic containing a recycle symbol should be recycled. Plastic lacking the recycle symbol should be discarded as indus-
trial waste.
- Small electronics, insulated cables, and motors: Should be recycled via electronics scrap disposal companies specialized in
separating and sorting as described above.
Disposal regulations vary from locality to locality and may be modified over time. Specific regulations and guidelines should be verified at 
the time of waste processing to ensure that current requirements are being fulfilled. For specific assistance in understanding and applying
regional regulations and policies, or manufacturer’s recommendations, refer to the local Siemens service representative for additional 
information.
25 – 1
26 Technical Data
WL Power Circuit Breaker

Ratings for UL 1066 Listed (ANSI C37) Breakers
WL
WLframe
frameratings
ratings––Frame
Framesize
size22 800A
800A 1600A
1600A
Rating Class
Rating Class NN SS HH LL FF N
N SS HH LL FF
Interrupting
Interruptingcurrent
currentframe
frameIcs
Ics(kAIR
(kAICRMS)
RMS)50/60
50/60Hz
Hz 254VAC
254VAC 50
50 65
65 85
85 100
100 200
200 50
50 65
65 85
85 100
100 200
200
508VAC
508VAC 50
50 65
65 85
85 100
100 200
200 50
50 65
65 85
85 100
100 200
200
600VAC
600VAC —— —— —— —— 200
200 —
— —— —— —— 200
200
635VAC
635VAC 50
50 65
65 65
65 85
85 —— 50
50 65
65 65
65 85
85 ——
Short-time currentIcw
Short-timecurrent Icw(kA
(kARMS)
RMS) 11sec.
sec. 50
50 65
65 65
65 85
85 —— 50
50 65
65 65
65 85
85 ——
Close
Closeand
andlatch
latchrating
rating(kA
(kARMS)
RMS) 50
50 65
65 65
65 85
85 —— 50
50 65
65 65
65 85
85 ——
Applicable
Applicablerating
ratingplug
plugrange
range 200
200--800A
800A 200
200 -- 1600A
1600A
Mechanical
Mechanicalmake-time
make-time(ms)(ms) 35
35 35
35
Mechanical
Mechanicalbreak-time
break-time(ms)
(ms) 34
34 34
34
Electric
Electricclose
closemake-time
make-time(ms)(ms) 50
50 50
50
Electric
Electrictrip/
trip/UVUVbreak-time
break-time(ms)(ms) 40/73
40/73 40/73
40/73
Electric
Electrictrip
tripand
andreclose
recloseinterval
interval(ms)
(ms) 80
80 80
80
Mechanicalduty
Mechanical dutycycles
cycles(no
(with maint.1)
maint.) 15,000
15,000 15,000
15,000
Electricalduty
Electrical dutycycles
cycles(no
(with maint.1)
maint) 15,000
15,000 15,000
15,000
Draw-outbreaker
Draw-out breakerefficiency
efficiency(Watts
(Wattsloss
lossat
atrated
ratedInIn)) 85
85 320
320
Draw-outfused
Draw-out fusedbreaker
breakerefficiency
efficiency(Watts
(Wattsloss
lossat
atrated
ratedInIn)) Consultfactory
Consult factory Consult factory
Consult factory
Ambientoperating
Ambient operatingtemperature
temperature(ºC)
(ºC) -25to
-25 to40
40 -25 to
-25 to 40
40
Weights(Fused
Weights (FusedBreaker/Breaker/Cradle)
Breaker/Breaker/Cradle)lbs. lbs. 227/159/112
227/159/112 227/159/112
227/159/112
WLframe
WL frameratings
ratings––Frame
Framesize
size22 2000A
2000A 3200A
3200A
RatingClass
Rating Class SS HH LL FF SS H
H LL
Interruptingcurrent
Interrupting currentframe Ics
frameIcs 254VAC
254VAC 65
65 85
85 100
100 200
200 65
65 85
85 100
100
(kAICRMS)
(kAIR RMS)50/60
50/60Hz
Hz 508VAC
508VAC 65
65 85
85 100
100 200
200 65
65 85
85 100
100
600VAC
600VAC —— —— —— 200
200 —— —
— ——
635VAC
635VAC 65
65 65
65 85
85 —— 65
65 65
65 85
85
Short-timecurrent
Short-time Icw(kA
currentIcw (kARMS)
RMS) 11sec.
sec. 65
65 65
65 85
85 —— 65
65 65
65 85
85
Closeand
Close andlatch
latchrating
rating(kA
(kARMS)
RMS) 65
65 65
65 85
85 —— 65
65 65
65 85
85
Applicablerating
Applicable ratingplug
plugrange
range 200--2000A
200 2000A 200 -- 3200A
200 3200A
Mechanicalmake-time
Mechanical make-time(ms)
(ms) 35
35 35
35
Mechanicalbreak-time
Mechanical break-time(ms)
(ms) 34
34 34
34
Electric close make-time (ms) 50 50
Electric close make-time (ms) 50 50
Electric trip/ UV break-time (ms) 40/73 40/73
Electric trip/ UV break-time (ms) 40/73 40/73
Electric trip and reclose interval (ms) 80 80
Electric trip and reclose interval (ms) 80 80
Mechanical duty cycles (with maint.1) 15,000 15,000
Mechanical duty cycles (no maint.)1 15,000 15,000
Electrical duty cycles (with maint. ) 15,000 15,000
Electrical duty cycles (no maint) 15,000 15,000
Draw-out breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated In) 700 1650
Draw-out breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated In) 700 1650
Draw-out fused breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated In) Consult factory Consult factory
Draw-out fused breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated In) Consult factory Consult factory
Ambient operating temperature (ºC) -25 to 40 -25 to 40
Ambient operating temperature (ºC) -25 to 40 -25 to 40
Weights (Fused Breaker/Breaker/Cradle) lbs. 227/209/152 227/209/152
Weights (Fused Breaker/Breaker/Cradle) lbs. 227/209/152 227/209/152
1) Maintenance means: replacing main contacts and arc chutes (see operating instructions) 
M-Class main contacts can be replaced by Siemens personnel only.
2) Short-time Withstand Current ICW at 635VAC is 85 kAIC RMS
3) max. 600 V AC
26 – 1
WL Power Circuit Breaker
Ratings for UL 1066 Listed (ANSI C37) Breakers
WL frame ratings – Frame size 3 3200A 4000A 5000A

Rating Class M F H L M F H L M F
Interrupting current frame Ics 254VAC 150 200 85 100 150 200 85 100 150 200
(kAIC RMS) 50/60 Hz 508VAC 150 200 85 100 150 200 85 100 150 200
600VAC — 200 — — — 200 — — — 200
635VAC 85 — 85 85 85 — 85 85 85 —
Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 1 sec. 100 2 1 — 85 100 2 100 2 — 85 100 2 100 2 —
Close and latch rating (kA RMS) 100 2 — 85 100 2 100 2 — 85 100 2 100 2 —
Applicable rating plug range 800 - 3200A 800 - 4000A 800 - 5000 A
Mechanical make-time (ms) 35 35 35
Mechanical break-time (ms) 34 34 24
Electric close make-time (ms) 50 50 50
Electric trip/ UV break-time (ms) 40/73 40/73 40/73
Electric trip and reclose interval (ms) 80 80 80
Mechanical duty cycles (with maint.1) 10,000 10,000 10,000
Electrical duty cycles (with maint.1) 10,000 10,000 10,000
Draw-out breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated I n) 700 1100 1650
Draw-out fused breaker efficiency (Watts loss at rated In) Consult factory Consult factory Consult Factory
Ambient operating temperature (ºC) -25 to 40 -25 to 40 -25 to 40
Weights (Fused Carriage/Breaker/Cradle) lbs. 225/260/306 225/260/306 225/260/306
WL frame ratings Frame size 2 Frame size 3

800 - 2000A 3200 - 5000A
Rating Class F3 L F3 L
Breaking capacity with external relay (kA RMS) 254VAC 20 100 40 100
50/60 Hz, instantaneous trip 508VAC 20 100 40 100
635VAC 20 85 40 85
Short-time current Icw (kA RMS) 1 sec. 20 65 40 100 2
1) Maintenance means: replacing main contacts and arc chutes (see operating instructions) 
2) Short-time Withstand Current ICW at 635VAC is 85 kAIC RMS
3) max. 600 V AC
26 – 2
WL Circuit Breakers
Frame Size II Frame Size III

Frame Rating 800 1600 2000 3200 3200 4000 5000
Endurance
Mechanical operating
(without maintenance) cycles 12,500 12,500 10,000 10,000 5,000 5,000 5,000
Mechanical operating
(with maintenance) 1 cycles 15,000 15,000 15,000 15,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
Electrical operating
(without maintenance) cycles 7,500 7,500 4,000 4,000 2,000 2,000 2,000
Electrical operating
(with maintenance) 1 cycles 15,000 15,000 15,000 15,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
Switching frequency 1/h 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
Minimum interval
between circuit breaker
trip and next closing of the
circuit breaker (when
used with the automatic
mechanical reset of the
reclosing lockout ms 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
Mounting position
Secondary disconnect screw-
wire sizes (Cu) type 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14
max # of aux. terminal or or or or or or or
connecting leads x cross 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16
section (solid or stranded) spring
clamp
terminal 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14
Ring 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14 2 x AWG 14
2 2
terminal 1 x AWG 10 1 x AWG 10 1 x AWG 10 2 1 x AWG 10 2 1 x AWG 10 2 1 x AWG 10 2 1 x AWG 10 2
system 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16 2 x AWG 16
TOC wire connection size spring
(Cu) max # of aux. clamp
connecting leads x cross terminal
section (solid or stranded) 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14
Weight 3
Circuit Breaker kg/lb 72/159 72/159 75/165 95/209 118/260 118/260 118/260
Cradle
MOC wire connection Bare
size (Cu) max # of aux. wire
connecting leads x cross pressure
section (solid or stranded) terminal 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14 1 x AWG 14
1 Maintenance consists of replacing main contacts and arc chutes (see operating instructions.)
2 For use only with ring terminals supplied by Siemens (WL10RL).
3 Fused circuit breaker weights (kg/lb) Frame size II (fused) Frame size III (fused)
cirucuit-breaker 103/227 same as table above
Cradle
Fuse carriage – 102/225
26 – 3
WL Circuit Breaker Accessory Ratings
Manual-operating mechanism with Mechanical Closing
Closing/charging the closing spring
Maximum actuating force required on hand
52 lbs
lever
Number of hand lever strokes required 9
Motor-operating mechanism with Mechanical and Electrical Closing
Charging the closing spring
Closing coil and Shunt Trip Coil voltage tolerance 24V DC 14 - 28V DC
48V DC 28 - 56V DC
120V AC / 70 - 140V DC
125V DC 104 - 127V AC
140 - 280V DC
240V AC / 208 - 254V AC
250V DC 180Y / 104V AC
220Y / 127V AC
Power consumption (5% duty cycle) 120 W for 50 ms
Minimum closing coil actuation signal required
50 ms
(5% duty cycle)
Motor-operating mechanism with Mechanical and Electrical Closing
Motor for charging closing spring
Motor voltage tolerance at 120V AC, 240V AC 85 - 110%
Extended tolerance for battery operation at 
70 - 126%
24 V DC, 48 V DC, 125 V DC, 250 V DC
Power consumption of the motor 110 W
Time required for charging the closing spring 10s
For motor and closing coil 
short-circuit protection
Short-circuit protection
24 - 60 V 6A
Standard slow-blow cartridge
110 - 250 V 3A
Auxiliary Release
Undervoltage release (UVR) Operating values 85% (circuit breaker can be closed)
35 - 70% (circuit breaker opens)
AC Coil voltage tolerance at 120 V AC, 
85 - 110%
240 V AC
DC Extended tolerance for battery operation
85 - 126%
at 24 V DC, 48 V DC, 125 V DC, 250 V DC
Rated control supply voltage AC 50/60 Hz V 120, 240
DC V 24, 48, 125, 250
Power consumption (inrush / contiuous) AC VA 200 / 5
DC W 200 / 5
Opening time of the circuit breaker for AC / DC ms 200
UVR (no delay time ), 2 settings
Setting 1 ms 80
Setting 2 ms 200
UVR (with delay time )
Adjustable delay s 0.2 to 3.2
Reset by additional NC direct opening ms 100
26 – 4
Auxiliary Contacts and Mechanism Operated Contacts (MOC)
Alternating current 
Contact rating Rated operational voltage 240 V
50/60 Hz
Rated operational current, continuous 10A
Rated operational current, making 30A
Rated operational current, breaking 3A
Direct current Rated operational voltage 24 V, 125 V, 250 V
Rated operational current, making 1.1A at 24 V, 1.1A at 125 V, 0.55 A at 250 V
Rated operational current, breaking 1.1A at 24 V, 1.1 A at 125 V, 0.55 A at 250 V
Bell Alarm Switch and "Ready-to-close" Signal Contact
50/60 Hz
Direct current Rated operational voltage 24 V, 48 V, 125 V 250 V DC1)
Rated operational current, continuous 0.4 A 0.2 A
Rated operational current, making 0.4 A 0.2 A
Rated operational current, breaking 0.4 A 0.2 A
Shunt release, UVR and tripped signaling contacts
Contact rating Rated operational voltage 127 V, 240 V
50/60 Hz
125 V DC (IEC
Direct current Rated operational voltage 24 V, 48 V, 125 V, 48 V DC
rating only)
Rated operational current, making 1.0 A 0.4 A
Rated operational current, breaking 1.0 A 0.4 A
1) 250 V DC rating available since October 2005.
26 – 5
Truck Operated Contacts (TOC)
50/60 Hz
Rated operational current, continuous 10 A
Direct current Rated operational voltage 24 V 24 V, 48 V, 125 V 250 V
Rated operational current, continuous 6A 1A 1A
Rated operational current, making 6A 0.22 A 0.11 A
Rated operational current, breaking 6A 0.22 A 0.11 A
26 – 6
WL Circuit Breaker
Function ov erview of the electronic trip units
Basic Functions ETU745 ETU776

Long-time overcurrent protection
Function can be switched ON/OFF – –

Setting range IR = In x … 0.4, 0.45, 0.5, 0.55, 0.6, 40-100% of In (Adjustable in Amps 1 )
0.65, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1
Switch-selectable overload protection
In
L (I2t or I 4t dependent function)
Setting range of delay time class t R at I 2t 2, 3.5, 5.5, 8, 10, 2 … 30 (step: 0.1s)
(seconds) 14, 17, 21, 25, 30
Setting range of delay time t R at I 4t 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 1 … 5 (step: 0.1s)

(seconds)
Thermal memor (via slide switch) (on/off via key pad or communications)
Phase loss sensitivity at tsd=20ms (M) (on/off via key pad or communications)
N-conductor protection
N Function can be switched ON/OFF (via slide switch) (via key pad or communications)
N-conductor setting range IN = In x 0.5 … 1 0.5 … 2, OFF
Short-time delayed overcurrent protection
Function can be switched ON/OFF (via rotary switch) (via key pad or communications)
Setting range Isd = In x … 1.25, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 1.25 … 0.8 x Icw = max
3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 (step: 10A)
Setting range of delay time tsd, fixed 0.02 (M), 0.1, 0.2, M, 0.08 … 0.4, OFF (step: 0.001s)
S
(seconds) 0.3, 0.4, OFF
Switch-selectable short-time delayed (via rotary coding switch) (via key pad or communications)
short-circuit protection
(I2t dependent function)
Setting range of delay time tsd at I2t 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 0.1 … 0.4 (step: 0.001s)
(seconds)
Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI) function per CubicleBUS module per CubicleBUS module
Instantaneous overcurrent protection
Function can be switched ON/OFF, (via rotary coding switch) (via key pad or communications)
Extended Instantaneous Protection
I is enabled when OFF
1.5, 2.2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 1.5 x In … 0.8 x Ics = max, OFF= Icw =EIP 1
Setting range Ii = In x … 0.8 x Icw = max, OFF= I cw =EIP 2
Ground fault protection 3 O (field installable module) O (field installable module)

Trip and alarm function
(via key pad or communications)
Detection of the ground fault current
by residual summing method
Detection of the ground fault current
by direct summing method
Setting range of the Ig for trip A,, B, C, D, E (100… 1200A) A … E (step: 1A)
G Setting range of the Ig for alarm A, B, C, D, E (100… 1200A) A … E (step: 1A)
Setting range of the delay time tg 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 0.1 … 2.0 (step: 0.001s)
(seconds)
Switch-selectable
ground fault protection
(I2t / fixed)
Setting range delay time tg at I2t 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5 0.1 … 2.0 (step: 0.001s)
ZSI ground function per CubicleBUS module per CubicleBUS module
1 Note: ETU776 settings via communications: 10A steps for Instantaneous and Short Time pickup, all others 1A steps.
Via ETU Keypad: Below 1000A: 10A steps 1000A-1600A: 50A steps
1600A-10000A: 100A steps Above 10000A, 1000A steps
2 Extended Instantaneous Protection (EIP) allows the WL circuit breaker to be applied at the withstand rating of available
the circuit breaker with minus 0% tolerance; this means there is no instantaneous override at all. EIP further – not available
enables the circuit breaker to be applied up to the full instantaneous rating of the circuit breaker in systems
O optional
where the available fault current exceeds the withstand rating.
Notes:
M = Motor protection setting indicates phase loss sensitivity is enabled. LT pick-up reduced 80% when phase unbalance > 50%. ST = 20 ms
Communications = Setting the parameters of the trip unit via the Breaker Data Adapter, MODBUS, or PROFIBUS
Key pad = Direct input on the trip unit
26 – 7
WL Circuit Breaker
Function overview of the electronic trip units
Basic Functions ETU745 ETU776

Parameter sets
Selectable between
parameter set A and B –
LCD
LCD, alphanumeric (4-line) O –
LCD, graphic –
Communication
CubicleBUS integrated
Communication capability via
MODBUS or PROFIBUS
Metering function
Metering function capability with
Metering Function or
Metering Function PLUS
Display by LED
Trip unit active
Alarm
ETU error
L trip
S trip
I trip
N trip
G trip (only with ground fault module) (only with ground fault module)
G alarm (only with ground fault module) (only with ground fault module)
Tripped by extended protection or
protective relay function
Communication
Signal contacts with external CubicleBUS modules
(opto or relay)
Overcurrent warning
Load shedding OFF ON
Early signal of long- time trip (200ms)
Temperature alarm
Phase unbalance
Instantaneous trip
Short-time trip
Long-time trip
Neutral conductor trip
Ground fault protection trip (only with ground fault module) (only with ground fault module)
Ground fault alarm (only with ground fault module) (only with ground fault module)
Auxiliar y relay
ETU error
available
– not available
O optional
26 – 8
27 Abbreviations
A Set current for ground fault protection
A 1/2 Output signal 1/2 (mechanical interlocking module)
AC Alternating current
AMP AMP Incorporated, Harrisburg
ANSI American National Standard Institute
AWG American Wire Gauge
B Set current for ground-fault protection
BSS Breaker Status Sensor
C Set current for ground-fault protection
CC Closing coil
COM15 Communication interface
COMM. Communication
CONNECT Connected position

CUB - c-
CUB + c+
D Set current for ground-fault protection

DC Direct current
DIN German Engineering Standard
DISCON Disconnected position

E Set current for ground-fault protection
E 1/2 Input signal 1/2 (mechanical interlocking)
ED Duty cycle
ESD Electrostatic-sensitive device
EN European Standard
ETU Trip unit (electronic trip unit)

EXTEND. Extended (additional) protection function
F1 1st shunt trip
F2 2nd shunt trip

F3 Undervoltage release
F4 Undervoltage release with delay time
F5 Tripping coil
F7 Remote reset coil
G-alarm Ground-fault alarm
G-tripping Ground-fault tripping

I/O Input / Output module
I2 t Delay time-current relationship based on formula I2t=constant

2
I tg Delay time for ground-fault based on formula I2tg = constant
I2tsd Delay time for S tripping based on formula I2tsd = constant
I4 t Delay time-current relationship based on formula I4t = constant
27 – 1
I-tripping Instantaneous tripping (short-circuit)
Iab Operating value for load shedding
Ian Operating value for load restore
Ics Rated operational short-circuit breaking capacity

Icu Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity
Icw Rated short-time withstand current
ID Identification number
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
Ig Current setting value for G-tripping
Ii Current setting value for I-tripping

IIT Single-pole short-circuit test current (IT systems)
IN Current setting value for N-tripping
In Rated current (value of Rating Plug)
In max Max. possible rated current
IR Current setting value for L-tripping
Isd Current setting value for S-tripping
L1 Phase 1
L2 Phase 2
L3 Phase 3
L-tripping Long-time delayed tripping (overload)

LED Light emitting diode
M Motor
MOC Mechanism Operated Auxiliary Conntacts

N Neutral pole
NC Normally closed contact
NO Normally open contact

N-tripping Neutral (overload) tripping
PIDG Ring lug style (Trademark of AMP)
PZ 3...6 Crimping tool (Weidmüller GmbH)
S 1/2/3 Circuit breaker 1/2/3 (mechanical interlocking module)
S1 Contact position-driven auxiliary switch
S10 Switch Electrical Closed
S11 Motor cut-off switch
S12 Motor disconnect switch
S13 Cut-off switch for remote reset
S14 Cut-off switch for shunt trip F1 (fast operation)
S15 Cut-off switch for closing coil CC (fast operation)
S20 Signaling switch for "ready-to-close"
S21 Signaling switch for "closing spring charged"
S22 Signaling switch for 1st shunt trip
S23 Signaling switch for 2nd shunt trip
27 – 2
S24 Bell Alarm signaling switch
S30 Signaling switch for disconnected position (TOC)
S31 Signaling switch for test position (TOC)

S32 Signaling switch for test position (TOC)
S33 Signaling switch for connected position (TOC)

S40 csignaling switch for "ready-to-close"

S41 c signaling switch for "closing spring charged"
S43 c signaling switch for 2nd shunt trip
S44 c signaling switch for "main contacts OPEN / CLOSED"
S45 c tripped signaling switch
S46 c signaling switch for connected position
S47 c signaling switch for test position
S48 c signaling switch for disconnected position

S50 ... S53 MOC (external auxiliary switches)

S-tripping Short-time delayed tripping
SIGUT Siemens trademark for aux. termination technique
ST Shunt trip
T.U. ERROR Trip unit error
TEST Test position
tg Delay time for G-tripping

TOC Truck operated cell switch (S30 … S35)
tR Delay time for L-tripping (defined at 6 x IR)
TRIP G Trip cause was ground fault
TRIP I Trip cause was short-circuit (instantaneous)
TRIP L Trip cause was overload
TRIP N Trip cause was neutral pole overload
TRIP S Trip cause was short-circuit (short-time delayed)
tsd Delay time for S-tripping
tx Delay time for load monitoring
Uc Rated control voltage
Ue Rated operational voltage
Ui Rated insulation voltage
UImp Rated impulse withstand voltage
UVR Undervoltage release (instantaneous)
UVR td Undervoltage release (delayed)
VT Voltage transformer
27 – 3
WAGO WAGO Kontakttechnik, München
X Terminal designation according to DIN
ZSI Zone Selective Interlocking
Iavg Present average of current

Iavglt Long term average of current
ITHD Distortion factor of current
UTHD Distortion factor of voltage
27 – 4
28 Glossary
Automatic reset
Circuit breakers feature an automatic reset of the tripping coil. No manual resetting of the Trip Unit is required to 
place the circuit breaker in a "Ready-to-close" state. UL 1066 circuit breakers are factory-fitted with this automatic reset feature as standard. 
The automatic reset feature can be removed as a customer option.
Auxiliary releases
Both undervoltage releases and shunt trips are available.
BSS module
Breaker Status Sensor - for collecting circuit breaker status information via signaling switches and transmitting these data to the
c.
Closing coil
A coil used for electrically closing the circuit breaker.
Closing spring
Module containing a spring as an energy store. The spring is charged by means of a hand-operated lever or a motor, and is latched in its
charged state. When the latches are released, the stored energy is transmitted to the pole and the circuit breaker closes.
Coding of auxiliary connectors
The auxiliary connectors are coded to prevent accidental interchanging of the auxiliary wiring connections.
COM modules
Communication modules with access to the circuit breaker:
- Reading and writing parameters
- Reading circuit breaker states/measured values
- Closing and opening the circuit breaker via fieldbus
- Additional functions via floating outputs or inputs
- Implementing breaker-internal cinformation
Additional functions when a draw-out breaker is used:
- Sensing position of circuit breaker in guide frame
COM15 module
COM15 communication module with access to the circuit breaker via the PROFIBUS DP fieldbus interface.
COM16 module
COM16 communication module with access to the circuit breaker via the Modbus RTU fieldbus interface.
COM35 module
COM35 communication module with access to the circuit breaker via the two fieldbus interfaces PROFINET IO and Modbus TCP.
Additional functions:
- Ethernet switch functionality
- Both protocols are available simultaneously on both ports
- Dynamic Arc Sentry (DAS)
- Firmware update
c
Bus system in the vicinity of the circuit breaker and to the FieldBus (PROFIBUS DP, PROFINET IO, Modbus RTU and Modbus TCP.)
Electrical closing lockout
For electrical interlocking of two or more circuit breakers (closing interlock). The electrical closing lockout can block the circuit breaker from
closing via a sustained signal.
Electrical Closed
Electrical activation of the stored energy through the closing coil.
28 – 1
Energy transformer
Power supply for the trip unit.
Guide rail
Used for placing the circuit breaker in the cradle.
Finger clusters
Connect the main terminals of the circuit breaker with the main terminals of the cradle.
Mechanical reclosing lockout and Bell Alarm
After tripping, the circuit breaker cannot be reclosed until the mechanical reclosing lockout has been reset by hand.
Mechanism Operated Auxiliary Contacts (MOC)
A switching module for signaling the circuit breakers switch position, which is mounted in the cradle and activated by the actuating shaft of
the circuit breaker.
The geared motor charges the closing spring automatically as soon as voltage is applied to the auxiliary connections. After closing, 
the closing spring is automatically charged for the next closing operation.
Position indicator
To show the circuit breaker position in the cradle.
Powerconfig
Software for commissioning and service, free of charge available at:www.siemens.com/powerconfig-download 
powerconfig (from Version 2.2) is used as a shared commissioning and maintenance tool for the circuit breakers with communication capa-
bility. It offers a standardized interface and a uniform operator control concept for the activities to be carried out, such as
- Parameterizing
- Operating
- Monitoring, and
- Diagnosing.
powerconfig currently supports German and English. “SENTRON communication handbook” → http://support.automation.siemens.com
Rated current coding
The rated current is coded at the factory, i.e. each and every circuit breaker can only be inserted into a cradle if they have the same rated
current.
Rating Plug
This module defines e.g. the setting range of the overload protection.
Remote reset
The electrical signal of the tripped signaling switch and the red reset button are reset by the optional remote reset coil.
Lock OPEN
This additional function prevents closing the circuit breaker and fulfils the disconnecting condition in OFF position as per IEC 60947-2:
- "Mechanical Off" button pressed
- main contacts OPEN
- crank handle of draw-out circuit breakers removed
- the various interlocking conditions are fulfilled.
Shunt trip
For remote circuit breaker tripping and locking against closing.
Shutter
Shutters are insulation plates for covering live main circuits in the cradle (shock protection).
Signaling switch for circuit breaker position (TOC)
These auxiliary switches operate according to the circuit breaker position in the cradle (-> Truck-operated contact).
Spring charging lever
The closing spring is charged by several pumping operations.
28 – 2
Tool operation
A cover with a hole (Ø 0,25") means that buttons can only be pressed using a rod.
TOC - Truck operated Cell Switch
For remote signaling of the circuit breaker position in the cradle.
Truck-operated contact (TOC)
A circuit breaker truck-operated auxiliary switch which is mounted in the compartment of a removable circuit breaker and is operated by the
circuit breaker frame (-> Signaling switch for breaker position).
Undervoltage release
For remote tripping and interlocking of the circuit breaker. Circuit breaker application in EMERGENCY OPEN circuits together with an
EMERGENCY OPEN facility to be arranged separately. The circuit breaker shall not be tripped by short-time voltage drops (e.g. motor start-
up).
Undervoltage release (time delayed)
For remote tripping and interlocking of the circuit breaker. The circuit breaker shall not be tripped by voltage drops (e.g. system transfers).
28 – 3
29 Index
A O
Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-1 Opening the circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Access block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 Options for guide frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-1
Arc chute covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
P
Auxiliary and control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
B Padlocking facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-16
Basic protective functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Positions of the circuit breaker in the guide frame . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55 Powerconfig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28-2
C Q
Circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Qualified Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
R
Closing Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Racking circuit breaker into connected position . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Coding between circuit breaker and guide frame . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4
Rating plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
COM module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59
Re-closing a circuit breaker tripped by an trip unit . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
COM16 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67, 9-68
Removing from service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-18
Connected position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Removing the circuit breaker from the guide frame . . . . . . . . .23-3
Contact erosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10
Replacing pole assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-21
Crank the circuit breaker into disconnected position . . . . . . . . 23-3
Replacing the internal current sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23-11
Cubicle door interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3
Replacing the trip unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
D Resetting the Bell Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
Dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Ring terminal system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Disconnected position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
S
Door sealing frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
Safety locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-1
E Screwless terminal system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Electronic components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Sealing caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-1
EMERGENCY OPEN button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Sealing covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-1
Secondary disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
F
Secondary disconnect terminal blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Frame sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Shunt Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-1
G Shutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18-1
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1 Standard specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
Ground-fault protection modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44 Storage spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
I T
Indicators and operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Test position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Inserting racking handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
Inserting the circuit breaker in the guide frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Trip unit ETU745 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Trip unit ETU776 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1 Tripping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
L Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-19
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 U
Lock OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2 Undervoltage release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-1, 11-3
Locking devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
W
Locking set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Wiring in guide frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
M
Z
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1
ZSI module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-87
Maintenance position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Make-break operations counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
Manual reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Mechanism-operated contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
MOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Motor disconnect switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Motor-operated mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Mounting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Mutual mechanical interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
29 – 1
Siemens Industry, Inc.
Norcross, GA 30092
Technical assistance:
1-800-241-3138
www.usa.siemens.com/powerdistribution
Version No.: CBIM-02000-0119

Sie Op WL Ul1066printupdated

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sie Op WL Ul1066printupdated

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sie Op WL Ul1066printupdated

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker

UL 1066 Circuit Breaker

Operating Instructions Catalog No.: CBIM-02000-0119

Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.

923 99984 174 3ZX1812-0WL00-1AN2

Torx screwdriver (T)

Hex socket screwdriver

Open end wrench

1 First step of action sequence

15 Locking devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 22 Plexiglas breaker cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

1.1 Circuit Breaker

(1) Arc chute  (page 23-5)

(with optional accessories)

(1) Arc chute cover (option)

2.1 Circuit breaker frame accessory label

(with terminal designations)

2.2 Circuit breaker frame type label

Power Breaker Frame

Frame Size: 2000A (1)

kA Symm. 254 / 508 V

(1) Maximum rated current

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

(1) Type of circuit breaker (WL)

2.4 Trip unit designation

(1) Catalog number

2.6 Cradle type label

Bz/Pos. 9344183 /20

(1) Catalog number

Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment/property damage.

c) Is trained in rendering first aid.

Unpack the circuit breaker and inspect it for damage.

Fixed Mounted Circuit Breaker

3-pole 4-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole 3-pole 4-pole

II 800 A 159 lb / 72 kg 210 lb / 95 kg 185 lb / 84 kg 112 lb / 51 kg 161 lb / 73 kg Only lift separately

II 1600 A 159 lb / 72 kg 210 lb / 95 kg 185 lb / 84 kg 112 lb / 51 kg 161 lb / 73 kg Only lift separately

Circuit Breaker Cradle

4.4.1 Lifting bar assembly (3-pole)

(1) Locking position for circuit breaker in frame size II

4.4.2 Lifting bar assembly (4-pole)

4.4.4 Lifting the fuse carriage (frame size III)

Lifting beam for circuit breaker and cradle (3-pole) WLLFT

Lifting beam for circuit breaker and cradle (4-pole) WLLFT4

Portable hoist for use with the lifting beam WLHOIST

Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.

High speed moving parts.

Can cause serious personal injury.

5.1.1 Mounting position

Can cause serious personal injury.

(1) 4 bolts (5/16“ diameter) + belleville washers + nuts

(1) Upper ventilation opening

Will cause death, serious personal injury, or equipment damage.

5.2.1 Cradle connections

Drawout Circuit breaker Connections to Line/Load side cradle connectors

Number of Available Busbar

800 A / 1600 A 1-3

II 2000 A 2-4 4“ x ¼“1) 4

III 4000 A / 5000 A 5-7 5“ x ¼“2) 6

1) The terminal permits the use of 2“ x ¼“ busbars is possible.

5.2.2 Horizontal connections for 4-pole fixed mount breakers